{"title":"Shop All Drinks","description":"\u003cp\u003eEvery beverage we stock — coffee, tea, water, soda, juice, energy and more.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"rishi-english-breakfast-organic-black-tea-malty-robust-black-tea-with-caramel-chocolate-notes-15-sachets","title":"Rishi Organic English Breakfast Black Tea, 15 Sachets","description":"\u003cp\u003eRishi English Breakfast Organic Black Tea is a box of 15 pyramid sachets holding a malty, brisk black tea sourced from Thailand, Yunnan and Myanmar. The cup is bold and full-bodied with caramel and roasted barley notes. It is sold as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, which suits morning routines at home, in offices and in cafés. Ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat sets Rishi English Breakfast apart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUSDA Certified Organic, single-ingredient black tea\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMalty, robust body with caramel and chocolate notes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHigh-caffeine breakfast style black tea\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDirect trade leaf from Thailand, Yunnan and Myanmar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKosher, vegan and gluten-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e15 pyramid sachets in Single, 3 or 6 box packs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Brew\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePour 8 oz of freshly boiled water, about 200°F, over one sachet and steep for 4 minutes. Lift the sachet out when the time is up. Drink it plain, or add milk and sweetener for a classic breakfast cup. Keep the box in a cool, dry cupboard between uses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Rishi Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRishi Tea \u0026amp; Botanicals has worked in organic, direct-trade tea since 1997, partnering with growers to source teas, herbs and botanicals. Its English Breakfast blend uses leaf from high-elevation gardens in Thailand, Yunnan and Myanmar. The pyramid sachets are plant-based, with no glues, staples or metal, so the leaves can open fully while steeping.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Rishi English Breakfast Organic Black Tea certified organic?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The product is described as USDA Certified Organic, a single-ingredient black tea sourced through direct trade from Thailand, Yunnan and Myanmar. It is also listed as Kosher, Vegan and Gluten-Free. Read the printed label on the box if you need to confirm certifications for a specific dietary requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Rishi English Breakfast Organic Black Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eSteep one pyramid sachet in 8 oz of freshly boiled water, about 200°F, for 4 minutes. Remove the sachet, then enjoy it plain or with milk and sweetener. The spacious pyramid bag lets the leaves unfurl fully while they steep, which helps the malty, caramel-toned flavor develop in the cup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Rishi English Breakfast Organic Black Tea contain caffeine?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It is a black tea described as high in caffeine, which is why it is a popular choice for breakfast or an afternoon pick-me-up. If you prefer a caffeine-free cup, a herbal blend is a better fit. Check the box for the most current product details.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes of Rishi English Breakfast tea are available for offices and cafés?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe 15-sachet box comes as a Single, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. A single box fits a home pantry, while the larger packs suit offices and cafés that serve a classic black tea every day and want to restock less often.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Rishi English Breakfast Organic Black Tea certified organic?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. The product is described as USDA Certified Organic, a single-ingredient black tea sourced through direct trade from Thailand, Yunnan and Myanmar. It is also listed as Kosher, Vegan and Gluten-Free. Read the printed label on the box if you need to confirm certifications for a specific dietary requirement.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I brew Rishi English Breakfast Organic Black Tea?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Steep one pyramid sachet in 8 oz of freshly boiled water, about 200°F, for 4 minutes. Remove the sachet, then enjoy it plain or with milk and sweetener. The spacious pyramid bag lets the leaves unfurl fully while they steep, which helps the malty, caramel-toned flavor develop in the cup.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Rishi English Breakfast Organic Black Tea contain caffeine?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. It is a black tea described as high in caffeine, which is why it is a popular choice for breakfast or an afternoon pick-me-up. If you prefer a caffeine-free cup, a herbal blend is a better fit. Check the box for the most current product details.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What pack sizes of Rishi English Breakfast tea are available for offices and cafés?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 15-sachet box comes as a Single, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. A single box fits a home pantry, while the larger packs suit offices and cafés that serve a classic black tea every day and want to restock less often.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Rishi Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604398637270,"sku":"RISHI-TEA-ENGLISH-BREAKFAST-SACHETS-1","price":14.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604398670038,"sku":"RISHI-TEA-ENGLISH-BREAKFAST-SACHETS-3","price":39.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604398702806,"sku":"RISHI-TEA-ENGLISH-BREAKFAST-SACHETS-6","price":75.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/71IC6hy4hrL._SL1500_d7830658-2074-4b48-b13e-59c0786a06df.webp?v=1791993077"},{"product_id":"kedem-sparkling-cider-100-apple-juice-non-alcoholic-25-4-fl-oz-750ml","title":"Kedem Non-Alcoholic Sparkling Apple Cider, 100% Juice, 750 mL","description":"\u003cp\u003eKedem Sparkling Cider is a 25.4 fl oz (750 mL) glass bottle of carbonated 100% apple juice with no alcohol and no sugar added. It is kosher for Passover, which makes it a common choice for holiday tables and toasts. BevCrate lists it as a single bottle or a Pack of 3, useful for dinners, brunches and larger gatherings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Kedem Sparkling Cider\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCarbonated 100% apple juice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-alcoholic, with no sugar added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKosher for Passover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e25.4 fl oz (750 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContains potassium sorbate and potassium metabisulfite, as listed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePack options: Single or Pack of 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottle thoroughly in the refrigerator, then pour into champagne flutes or festive glasses for toasts, brunches and holiday dinners. Open it gently and serve soon after for the liveliest bubbles. Store unopened bottles in a cool place.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Kedem\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eKedem is a kosher beverage brand known for grape and apple juices made for holidays, celebrations and everyday drinking. Its sparkling cider is meant for festive tables where a non-alcoholic toast is wanted alongside the usual glass of wine, and for gatherings of all ages.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Kedem Sparkling Cider alcoholic?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Kedem Sparkling Cider is non-alcoholic and is made from 100% carbonated apple juice with no sugar added. That makes it a bubbly option for toasts at family events, holidays and parties where some guests prefer not to drink alcohol. Always read the printed bottle label for complete details.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Kedem Sparkling Cider kosher for Passover?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, the product information lists it as kosher for Passover, and it is a popular pick for seders and other holiday meals. Certification marks appear on the bottle, so check the label for the specific symbol and any year-to-year details if observance matters to your household.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat are the ingredients in Kedem Sparkling Cider?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe listed ingredients are pure carbonated apple juice, with potassium sorbate and potassium metabisulfite added to help keep it fresh. If you are sensitive to sulfites or have another dietary concern, read the printed ingredient panel on the bottle before serving it to guests.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes of Kedem Sparkling Cider can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe 25.4 fl oz (750 mL) glass bottle is available as a Single or a Pack of 3. One bottle covers a small table toast, while three bottles help when you are hosting a holiday dinner, a brunch or an event with a longer guest list.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Kedem Sparkling Cider alcoholic?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"No. Kedem Sparkling Cider is non-alcoholic and is made from 100% carbonated apple juice with no sugar added. That makes it a bubbly option for toasts at family events, holidays and parties where some guests prefer not to drink alcohol. Always read the printed bottle label for complete details.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Kedem Sparkling Cider kosher for Passover?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes, the product information lists it as kosher for Passover, and it is a popular pick for seders and other holiday meals. Certification marks appear on the bottle, so check the label for the specific symbol and any year-to-year details if observance matters to your household.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What are the ingredients in Kedem Sparkling Cider?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The listed ingredients are pure carbonated apple juice, with potassium sorbate and potassium metabisulfite added to help keep it fresh. If you are sensitive to sulfites or have another dietary concern, read the printed ingredient panel on the bottle before serving it to guests.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What pack sizes of Kedem Sparkling Cider can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 25.4 fl oz (750 mL) glass bottle is available as a Single or a Pack of 3. One bottle covers a small table toast, while three bottles help when you are hosting a holiday dinner, a brunch or an event with a longer guest list.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Kedem","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604398735574,"sku":"KEDEM-SPARKLING-CIDER-750ML-SINGLE","price":9.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604398768342,"sku":"KEDEM-SPARKLING-CIDER-750ML-PACK3","price":26.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/cdr1.webp?v=1791993078"},{"product_id":"jones-soda-strawberry-lime-12-fl-oz-355-ml-glass-bottle-made-with-pure-cane-sugar","title":"Jones Soda Strawberry Lime, 12 fl oz Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Strawberry Lime is a 12 fl oz (355 mL) craft soda that pairs sweet strawberry with a tangy lime edge, bottled in glass and sweetened with pure cane sugar. The label lists it as kosher and gluten free. BevCrate sells it as a single bottle or in packs of 3, 6 and 12 for households, offices, cafés and events.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jones Soda Strawberry Lime\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: refreshingly tangy strawberry lime\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with pure cane sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eListed as kosher and gluten free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistinctive Jones label photography\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePack options: Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6, Pack of 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eServe it chilled in the bottle, or pour over crushed ice with a lime wedge on the rim. It also mixes well into a party punch bowl with sparkling water and sliced fruit. Store sealed bottles upright in a cool, dry spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jones Soda\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Co. is an independent soda company that began making flavored sodas in the 1990s. It has built its identity around cane sugar recipes and label art made from photos that fans submit, so each run of bottles looks a little different from the last.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Jones Soda Strawberry Lime sweetened with cane sugar?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, the product information says it is made with pure cane sugar and not corn syrup. It is also listed as kosher and gluten free. Manufacturers can adjust recipes, so read the printed label on the bottle for the full ingredient list if you have dietary needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I serve Jones Soda Strawberry Lime?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eChill it thoroughly and drink it from the long-neck glass bottle, or pour it over ice with a lime wedge. It can also be added to a party punch with sparkling water and fruit slices. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place until you are ready to chill them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat flavor is Jones Soda Strawberry Lime?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt combines strawberry sweetness with a tangy, citrusy lime bite, finishing crisp from the carbonation. The tartness stops it from tasting too sugary, and the cane sugar base keeps it tasting like a classic soda-shop flavor. It suits people who like fruit sodas with some zing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I stock Jones Soda Strawberry Lime in larger packs?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The 12 fl oz glass bottle is listed as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 and Pack of 12. Choose a single bottle to sample, or a larger pack to keep an office fridge, café cooler or party cooler supplied with a fun glass-bottle option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Jones Soda Strawberry Lime sweetened with cane sugar?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes, the product information says it is made with pure cane sugar and not corn syrup. It is also listed as kosher and gluten free. Manufacturers can adjust recipes, so read the printed label on the bottle for the full ingredient list if you have dietary needs.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I serve Jones Soda Strawberry Lime?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Chill it thoroughly and drink it from the long-neck glass bottle, or pour it over ice with a lime wedge. It can also be added to a party punch with sparkling water and fruit slices. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place until you are ready to chill them.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What flavor is Jones Soda Strawberry Lime?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It combines strawberry sweetness with a tangy, citrusy lime bite, finishing crisp from the carbonation. The tartness stops it from tasting too sugary, and the cane sugar base keeps it tasting like a classic soda-shop flavor. It suits people who like fruit sodas with some zing.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I stock Jones Soda Strawberry Lime in larger packs?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. The 12 fl oz glass bottle is listed as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 and Pack of 12. Choose a single bottle to sample, or a larger pack to keep an office fridge, café cooler or party cooler supplied with a fun glass-bottle option.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jones Soda Co.","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604398801110,"sku":"JONES-STRAWBERRYLIME-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604398833878,"sku":"JONES-STRAWBERRYLIME-12OZ-PACK3","price":8.39,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604398866646,"sku":"JONES-STRAWBERRYLIME-12OZ-PACK6","price":15.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604398899414,"sku":"JONES-STRAWBERRYLIME-12OZ-PACK12","price":28.81,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/931703.jpg?v=1791993080"},{"product_id":"jones-soda-orange-cream-12-fl-oz-355-ml-glass-bottle-made-with-pure-cane-sugar","title":"Jones Soda Orange \u0026 Cream, 12 fl oz Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Orange \u0026amp; Cream is a 12 fl oz (355 mL) craft soda in a long-neck glass bottle, with bright orange flavor and a smooth cream finish, sweetened with pure cane sugar. The label is also listed as kosher and gluten free. BevCrate stocks it as a single bottle or in packs of 3, 6 and 12, which suits fridge stocking at home, office pantries, cafés and party tables.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jones Soda Orange \u0026amp; Cream\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: bright orange with a smooth cream finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with pure cane sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSingle-serve 12 fl oz (355 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eListed as kosher and gluten free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabel art built from customer-submitted photos\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePack options: Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6, Pack of 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles for a few hours and open them straight from the fridge, or pour over ice in a tall glass. For a dessert-style treat, add a scoop of vanilla ice cream to make a quick float. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jones Soda\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Co. is an independent soda company that has been making flavored sodas since the 1990s. It is best known for labels that carry photos sent in by its own fans, and for recipes built on real cane sugar. Each bottle in the range follows that same quirky, personality-first formula.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Jones Soda Orange \u0026amp; Cream made with cane sugar?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, this soda is sweetened with pure cane sugar rather than corn syrup, according to the product details. It is also listed as kosher and gluten free. Ingredient wording can change between production runs, so read the printed label on the bottle if you follow a specific diet or have allergies.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve Jones Soda Orange \u0026amp; Cream?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled, either straight from the glass bottle or poured over ice. A scoop of vanilla ice cream turns it into an easy float for parties and barbecues. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place and refrigerate them a few hours before drinking for the crispest fizz.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Jones Soda Orange \u0026amp; Cream taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt tastes like a classic orange cream pop: a bright orange note up front followed by a smooth, creamy finish. The cane sugar sweetness keeps it tasting old-fashioned instead of syrupy, and the carbonation makes it crisp. It is a good pick for people who remember soda-shop flavors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I buy Jones Soda Orange \u0026amp; Cream in multipacks for an office or café?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The 12 fl oz glass bottle is offered as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 and Pack of 12. Singles work for a quick taste test, while the larger packs suit office fridges, café coolers, guest drinks and party stocking without reordering each time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Jones Soda Orange \u0026 Cream made with cane sugar?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes, this soda is sweetened with pure cane sugar rather than corn syrup, according to the product details. It is also listed as kosher and gluten free. Ingredient wording can change between production runs, so read the printed label on the bottle if you follow a specific diet or have allergies.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve Jones Soda Orange \u0026 Cream?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled, either straight from the glass bottle or poured over ice. A scoop of vanilla ice cream turns it into an easy float for parties and barbecues. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place and refrigerate them a few hours before drinking for the crispest fizz.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Jones Soda Orange \u0026 Cream taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It tastes like a classic orange cream pop: a bright orange note up front followed by a smooth, creamy finish. The cane sugar sweetness keeps it tasting old-fashioned instead of syrupy, and the carbonation makes it crisp. It is a good pick for people who remember soda-shop flavors.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I buy Jones Soda Orange \u0026 Cream in multipacks for an office or café?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. The 12 fl oz glass bottle is offered as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 and Pack of 12. Singles work for a quick taste test, while the larger packs suit office fridges, café coolers, guest drinks and party stocking without reordering each time.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jones Soda Co.","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604398932182,"sku":"JONES-ORANGECREAM-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604398964950,"sku":"JONES-ORANGECREAM-12OZ-PACK3","price":8.39,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604398997718,"sku":"JONES-ORANGECREAM-12OZ-PACK6","price":15.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604399030486,"sku":"JONES-ORANGECREAM-12OZ-PACK12","price":28.81,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/43921.jpg?v=1791993080"},{"product_id":"jones-soda-root-beer-12-fl-oz-355-ml-glass-bottle-made-with-pure-cane-sugar","title":"Jones Soda Root Beer, 12 fl oz Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Root Beer is a 12 fl oz (355 mL) glass-bottled craft soda with an old-fashioned root beer flavor and a pure cane sugar recipe. It is listed as kosher and gluten free. BevCrate offers it as a single bottle or in packs of 3, 6 and 12, handy for home fridges, break rooms, cafés and cookouts.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jones Soda Root Beer\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: classic, old-fashioned root beer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with pure cane sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) long-neck glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eListed as kosher and gluten free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto labels submitted by Jones Soda fans\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePack options: Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6, Pack of 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRoot beer tastes best very cold, so chill the bottles ahead of time. Pour into a frosted glass for a soda-fountain feel, or build a float with vanilla ice cream. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place away from direct sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jones Soda\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Co. is an independent soda maker that has been producing flavored sodas since the 1990s. The brand is recognized for recipes using real cane sugar and for labels featuring photographs sent in by its own customers, which gives every bottle a slightly different look.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Jones Soda Root Beer use real cane sugar?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, the product details describe it as made with pure cane sugar instead of corn syrup. It is also listed as kosher and gluten free. Because formulas can be updated, check the printed label on your bottle for the full ingredient list and any allergen notes before serving.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the best way to serve Jones Soda Root Beer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it ice cold, either straight from the glass bottle or poured into a chilled glass. For a classic dessert, drop in a scoop of vanilla ice cream to make a root beer float. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place and refrigerate them before the party.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does Jones Soda Root Beer taste?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt has the familiar old-fashioned root beer profile: bold and classic, with a crisp carbonated bite. Cane sugar gives it a cleaner sweetness than corn syrup versions. It works well on its own, alongside casual meals and cookouts, or as the base for a root beer float with vanilla ice cream.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes of Jones Soda Root Beer are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe 12 fl oz glass bottle comes as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 and Pack of 12. Smaller packs are good for trying it or for gifting, and the Pack of 12 helps cafés, offices and restaurants keep a steady supply of glass-bottle soda on hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Jones Soda Root Beer use real cane sugar?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes, the product details describe it as made with pure cane sugar instead of corn syrup. It is also listed as kosher and gluten free. Because formulas can be updated, check the printed label on your bottle for the full ingredient list and any allergen notes before serving.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the best way to serve Jones Soda Root Beer?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it ice cold, either straight from the glass bottle or poured into a chilled glass. For a classic dessert, drop in a scoop of vanilla ice cream to make a root beer float. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place and refrigerate them before the party.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Jones Soda Root Beer taste?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It has the familiar old-fashioned root beer profile: bold and classic, with a crisp carbonated bite. Cane sugar gives it a cleaner sweetness than corn syrup versions. It works well on its own, alongside casual meals and cookouts, or as the base for a root beer float with vanilla ice cream.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What pack sizes of Jones Soda Root Beer are available?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 12 fl oz glass bottle comes as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 and Pack of 12. Smaller packs are good for trying it or for gifting, and the Pack of 12 helps cafés, offices and restaurants keep a steady supply of glass-bottle soda on hand.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jones Soda Co.","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604399063254,"sku":"JONES-ROOTBEER-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604399096022,"sku":"JONES-ROOTBEER-12OZ-PACK3","price":8.39,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604399128790,"sku":"JONES-ROOTBEER-12OZ-PACK6","price":15.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604399161558,"sku":"JONES-ROOTBEER-12OZ-PACK12","price":28.81,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/931705.jpg?v=1791993080"},{"product_id":"jones-soda-green-apple-12-fl-oz-355-ml-glass-bottle-made-with-pure-cane-sugar","title":"Jones Soda Green Apple, 12 fl oz Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Green Apple is a craft soda in a 12 fl oz (355 mL) long-neck glass bottle, made with pure cane sugar and offering a sweet and tart green apple taste. It is listed as kosher and gluten-free. Order a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 to stock a home fridge, office pantry, cafe cooler or party table. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jones Soda Green Apple\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: sweet-and-tart green apple flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMade with pure cane sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eListed as kosher and gluten-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) long-neck glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabel photography submitted by Jones Soda fans, so artwork varies by run\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAvailable as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eServe Jones Soda Green Apple well chilled, either straight from the glass bottle or poured over ice. It suits school-style lunches, picnics and snack tables. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from heat and sunlight, and drink an opened bottle soon so the carbonation stays crisp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jones Soda\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Co. is an independent soda company that has been making personality-driven drinks since the 1990s. It is known for recipes sweetened with cane sugar and for label photography contributed by its own customers. That community-built artwork, along with the long-neck glass bottle, makes the brand easy to recognize on a shelf or in a cooler.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Jones Soda Green Apple gluten-free or kosher?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Green Apple is listed as both kosher and gluten-free in the product details, and it is sweetened with pure cane sugar. Because formulas and certifications can change between production runs, read the printed label on the bottle for the current ingredient statement before serving anyone with a dietary need.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the best way to serve Jones Soda Green Apple?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it cold from the refrigerator or over ice, ideally straight from the long-neck bottle. It pairs well with school-style lunches, picnics and snack tables. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry spot out of direct sun, and finish an opened bottle promptly because the fizz fades with time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Jones Soda Green Apple taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Green Apple offers a sweet and tart green apple taste. Green Apple balances sweetness with a tart bite, which sets it apart from the rounder Cream Soda and the candy-style Blue Bubblegum. The cane sugar recipe gives it the rounder, soda-shop style that many people prefer over drinks made with corn syrup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jones Soda Green Apple are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Green Apple is sold as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. The larger packs are handy for offices, cafes, restaurants and events that go through glass-bottle soda quickly, while the Single works for sampling one flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Jones Soda Green Apple gluten-free or kosher?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Green Apple is listed as both kosher and gluten-free in the product details, and it is sweetened with pure cane sugar. Because formulas and certifications can change between production runs, read the printed label on the bottle for the current ingredient statement before serving anyone with a dietary need.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the best way to serve Jones Soda Green Apple?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it cold from the refrigerator or over ice, ideally straight from the long-neck bottle. It pairs well with school-style lunches, picnics and snack tables. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry spot out of direct sun, and finish an opened bottle promptly because the fizz fades with time.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Jones Soda Green Apple taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Green Apple offers a sweet and tart green apple taste. Green Apple balances sweetness with a tart bite, which sets it apart from the rounder Cream Soda and the candy-style Blue Bubblegum. The cane sugar recipe gives it the rounder, soda-shop style that many people prefer over drinks made with corn syrup.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jones Soda Green Apple are available?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Green Apple is sold as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. The larger packs are handy for offices, cafes, restaurants and events that go through glass-bottle soda quickly, while the Single works for sampling one flavor.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jones Soda Co.","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604399194326,"sku":"JONES-GREENAPPLE-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604399227094,"sku":"JONES-GREENAPPLE-12OZ-PACK3","price":8.39,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604399259862,"sku":"JONES-GREENAPPLE-12OZ-PACK6","price":15.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604399292630,"sku":"JONES-GREENAPPLE-12OZ-PACK12","price":28.81,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/931701.jpg?v=1791993081"},{"product_id":"jones-soda-cream-soda-12-fl-oz-355-ml-glass-bottle-made-with-pure-cane-sugar","title":"Jones Soda Cream Soda, 12 fl oz Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Cream Soda is a craft soda in a 12 fl oz (355 mL) long-neck glass bottle, made with pure cane sugar and offering a crisp, smooth cream soda taste. It is listed as kosher and gluten-free. Order a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 to stock a home fridge, office pantry, cafe cooler or party table. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jones Soda Cream Soda\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: crisp, smooth cream soda flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMade with pure cane sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eListed as kosher and gluten-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) long-neck glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabel photography submitted by Jones Soda fans, so artwork varies by run\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAvailable as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eServe Jones Soda Cream Soda well chilled, either straight from the glass bottle or poured over ice. It suits ice cream floats, barbecues and diner-style menus. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from heat and sunlight, and drink an opened bottle soon so the carbonation stays crisp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jones Soda\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Co. is an independent soda company that has been making personality-driven drinks since the 1990s. It is known for recipes sweetened with cane sugar and for label photography contributed by its own customers. That community-built artwork, along with the long-neck glass bottle, makes the brand easy to recognize on a shelf or in a cooler.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Jones Soda Cream Soda gluten-free or kosher?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Cream Soda is listed as both kosher and gluten-free in the product details, and it is sweetened with pure cane sugar. Because formulas and certifications can change between production runs, read the printed label on the bottle for the current ingredient statement before serving anyone with a dietary need.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the best way to serve Jones Soda Cream Soda?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it cold from the refrigerator or over ice, ideally straight from the long-neck bottle. It pairs well with ice cream floats, barbecues and diner-style menus. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry spot out of direct sun, and finish an opened bottle promptly because the fizz fades with time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Jones Soda Cream Soda taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Cream Soda offers a crisp, smooth cream soda taste. Cream Soda is the smooth, mellow classic of the range, softer and less sharp than the fruit flavors, and it makes a natural base for floats. The cane sugar recipe gives it the rounder, soda-shop style that many people prefer over drinks made with corn syrup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jones Soda Cream Soda are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Cream Soda is sold as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. The larger packs are handy for offices, cafes, restaurants and events that go through glass-bottle soda quickly, while the Single works for sampling one flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Jones Soda Cream Soda gluten-free or kosher?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Cream Soda is listed as both kosher and gluten-free in the product details, and it is sweetened with pure cane sugar. Because formulas and certifications can change between production runs, read the printed label on the bottle for the current ingredient statement before serving anyone with a dietary need.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the best way to serve Jones Soda Cream Soda?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it cold from the refrigerator or over ice, ideally straight from the long-neck bottle. It pairs well with ice cream floats, barbecues and diner-style menus. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry spot out of direct sun, and finish an opened bottle promptly because the fizz fades with time.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Jones Soda Cream Soda taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Cream Soda offers a crisp, smooth cream soda taste. Cream Soda is the smooth, mellow classic of the range, softer and less sharp than the fruit flavors, and it makes a natural base for floats. The cane sugar recipe gives it the rounder, soda-shop style that many people prefer over drinks made with corn syrup.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jones Soda Cream Soda are available?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Cream Soda is sold as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. The larger packs are handy for offices, cafes, restaurants and events that go through glass-bottle soda quickly, while the Single works for sampling one flavor.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jones Soda Co.","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604399325398,"sku":"JONES-CREAMSODA-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604399358166,"sku":"JONES-CREAMSODA-12OZ-PACK3","price":8.39,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604399390934,"sku":"JONES-CREAMSODA-12OZ-PACK6","price":15.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604399423702,"sku":"JONES-CREAMSODA-12OZ-PACK12","price":28.81,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/931700.jpg?v=1791993082"},{"product_id":"jones-soda-berry-lemonade-12-fl-oz-355-ml-glass-bottle-made-with-pure-cane-sugar","title":"Jones Soda Berry Lemonade, 12 fl oz Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Berry Lemonade is a craft soda in a 12 fl oz (355 mL) long-neck glass bottle, made with pure cane sugar and offering a tangy lemonade with a juicy berry twist. It is listed as kosher and gluten-free. Order a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 to stock a home fridge, office pantry, cafe cooler or party table. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jones Soda Berry Lemonade\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: tangy lemonade flavor with a juicy berry twist\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMade with pure cane sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eListed as kosher and gluten-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) long-neck glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabel photography submitted by Jones Soda fans, so artwork varies by run\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAvailable as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eServe Jones Soda Berry Lemonade well chilled, either straight from the glass bottle or poured over ice. It suits summer cookouts and lemonade-style refreshment. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from heat and sunlight, and drink an opened bottle soon so the carbonation stays crisp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jones Soda\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Co. is an independent soda company that has been making personality-driven drinks since the 1990s. It is known for recipes sweetened with cane sugar and for label photography contributed by its own customers. That community-built artwork, along with the long-neck glass bottle, makes the brand easy to recognize on a shelf or in a cooler.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Jones Soda Berry Lemonade gluten-free or kosher?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Berry Lemonade is listed as both kosher and gluten-free in the product details, and it is sweetened with pure cane sugar. Because formulas and certifications can change between production runs, read the printed label on the bottle for the current ingredient statement before serving anyone with a dietary need.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the best way to serve Jones Soda Berry Lemonade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it cold from the refrigerator or over ice, ideally straight from the long-neck bottle. It pairs well with summer cookouts and lemonade-style refreshment. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry spot out of direct sun, and finish an opened bottle promptly because the fizz fades with time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Jones Soda Berry Lemonade taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Berry Lemonade offers a tangy lemonade with a juicy berry twist. Berry Lemonade is the tangy, fruit-and-citrus pick, brighter than the creamier or candy-style flavors in the Jones range. The cane sugar recipe gives it the rounder, soda-shop style that many people prefer over drinks made with corn syrup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jones Soda Berry Lemonade are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Berry Lemonade is sold as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. The larger packs are handy for offices, cafes, restaurants and events that go through glass-bottle soda quickly, while the Single works for sampling one flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Jones Soda Berry Lemonade gluten-free or kosher?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Berry Lemonade is listed as both kosher and gluten-free in the product details, and it is sweetened with pure cane sugar. Because formulas and certifications can change between production runs, read the printed label on the bottle for the current ingredient statement before serving anyone with a dietary need.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the best way to serve Jones Soda Berry Lemonade?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it cold from the refrigerator or over ice, ideally straight from the long-neck bottle. It pairs well with summer cookouts and lemonade-style refreshment. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry spot out of direct sun, and finish an opened bottle promptly because the fizz fades with time.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Jones Soda Berry Lemonade taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Berry Lemonade offers a tangy lemonade with a juicy berry twist. Berry Lemonade is the tangy, fruit-and-citrus pick, brighter than the creamier or candy-style flavors in the Jones range. The cane sugar recipe gives it the rounder, soda-shop style that many people prefer over drinks made with corn syrup.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jones Soda Berry Lemonade are available?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Berry Lemonade is sold as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. The larger packs are handy for offices, cafes, restaurants and events that go through glass-bottle soda quickly, while the Single works for sampling one flavor.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jones Soda Co.","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604399456470,"sku":"JONES-BERRYLEMONADE-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604399489238,"sku":"JONES-BERRYLEMONADE-12OZ-PACK3","price":8.39,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604399522006,"sku":"JONES-BERRYLEMONADE-12OZ-PACK6","price":15.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604399554774,"sku":"JONES-BERRYLEMONADE-12OZ-PACK12","price":28.81,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/43927.jpg?v=1791993082"},{"product_id":"jones-soda-blue-bubblegum-12-fl-oz-355-ml-glass-bottle-made-with-pure-cane-sugar","title":"Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum, 12 fl oz Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Blue Bubblegum is a craft soda in a 12 fl oz (355 mL) long-neck glass bottle, made with pure cane sugar and offering a sweet, nostalgic blue bubblegum taste. It is listed as kosher and gluten-free. Order a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 to stock a home fridge, office pantry, cafe cooler or party table. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: sweet, nostalgic blue bubblegum flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMade with pure cane sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eListed as kosher and gluten-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) long-neck glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabel photography submitted by Jones Soda fans, so artwork varies by run\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAvailable as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eServe Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum well chilled, either straight from the glass bottle or poured over ice. It suits kids' parties, game nights and retro-themed counters. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from heat and sunlight, and drink an opened bottle soon so the carbonation stays crisp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jones Soda\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJones Soda Co. is an independent soda company that has been making personality-driven drinks since the 1990s. It is known for recipes sweetened with cane sugar and for label photography contributed by its own customers. That community-built artwork, along with the long-neck glass bottle, makes the brand easy to recognize on a shelf or in a cooler.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum gluten-free or kosher?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Blue Bubblegum is listed as both kosher and gluten-free in the product details, and it is sweetened with pure cane sugar. Because formulas and certifications can change between production runs, read the printed label on the bottle for the current ingredient statement before serving anyone with a dietary need.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the best way to serve Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it cold from the refrigerator or over ice, ideally straight from the long-neck bottle. It pairs well with kids' parties, game nights and retro-themed counters. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry spot out of direct sun, and finish an opened bottle promptly because the fizz fades with time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Blue Bubblegum offers a sweet, nostalgic blue bubblegum taste. Blue Bubblegum is a sweet, candy-shop flavor with no fruit tartness, so it reads very differently from Green Apple or Berry Lemonade. The cane sugar recipe gives it the rounder, soda-shop style that many people prefer over drinks made with corn syrup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJones Soda Blue Bubblegum is sold as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. The larger packs are handy for offices, cafes, restaurants and events that go through glass-bottle soda quickly, while the Single works for sampling one flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum gluten-free or kosher?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum is listed as both kosher and gluten-free in the product details, and it is sweetened with pure cane sugar. Because formulas and certifications can change between production runs, read the printed label on the bottle for the current ingredient statement before serving anyone with a dietary need.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the best way to serve Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it cold from the refrigerator or over ice, ideally straight from the long-neck bottle. It pairs well with kids' parties, game nights and retro-themed counters. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry spot out of direct sun, and finish an opened bottle promptly because the fizz fades with time.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum offers a sweet, nostalgic blue bubblegum taste. Blue Bubblegum is a sweet, candy-shop flavor with no fruit tartness, so it reads very differently from Green Apple or Berry Lemonade. The cane sugar recipe gives it the rounder, soda-shop style that many people prefer over drinks made with corn syrup.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum are available?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jones Soda Blue Bubblegum is sold as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. The larger packs are handy for offices, cafes, restaurants and events that go through glass-bottle soda quickly, while the Single works for sampling one flavor.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jones Soda Co.","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604399620310,"sku":"JONES-BLUEBUBBLEGUM-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604399653078,"sku":"JONES-BLUEBUBBLEGUM-12OZ-PACK3","price":8.39,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604399685846,"sku":"JONES-BLUEBUBBLEGUM-12OZ-PACK6","price":15.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604399718614,"sku":"JONES-BLUEBUBBLEGUM-12OZ-PACK12","price":28.81,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/49042.jpg?v=1791993083"},{"product_id":"nestle-nesquik-strawberry-syrup-22-fl-oz","title":"Nestlé Nesquik Syrup, Strawberry, 22 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eNestlé Nesquik Strawberry Syrup is a 22 fl oz easy-squeeze bottle of sweet strawberry syrup for cold milk and desserts, with no artificial colors and no high fructose corn syrup, according to the label. You get about 31 servings per bottle. It comes as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, and ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat makes Nesquik Strawberry Syrup easy to stock\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e22 fl oz easy-squeeze bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweet strawberry flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors; color comes from natural sources such as beet powder\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo high fructose corn syrup, per the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAbout 31 servings, 50 calories per 1 tablespoon serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMixes into cold milk without clumping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Mix\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSqueeze syrup into a cup of cold milk and stir until the color is even for a quick strawberry milk. It also works over ice cream, pancakes or waffles. After opening, keep the bottle upright in the pantry and check the printed label for the manufacturer's current storage guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nesquik\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNesquik is made by Nestlé, one of the world's largest food and beverage companies, and has been part of family breakfast and snack routines since 1948. It is best known for chocolate and strawberry milk powders and syrups sold in grocery stores across the US and Canada.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many servings are in Nesquik Strawberry Syrup 22 fl oz?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe 22 fl oz bottle gives about 31 servings, using a 1 tablespoon serving size. That is roughly a month of daily strawberry milk for one person, or a couple of weeks in a busier home. Multipacks help if you want spare bottles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nesquik Strawberry Syrup have artificial colors or high fructose corn syrup?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe label states there are no artificial colors, with color coming from natural sources like beet powder, and no high fructose corn syrup. The ingredients also include sugar, water, malic acid, natural flavor and a preservative. Read the panel on the bottle for the current formula.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I make strawberry milk with Nesquik Strawberry Syrup?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eSqueeze the syrup into a glass of cold milk and stir until blended. Use a little more for a stronger strawberry taste or less for a lighter one. It also works as a drizzle over ice cream, pancakes, waffles and other desserts for a fruity finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Nesquik Strawberry Syrup are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOrder a Single 22 fl oz bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. One bottle is enough to try it, while packs fit families, school or daycare kitchens, dessert counters and cafés that serve flavored milk regularly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How many servings are in Nesquik Strawberry Syrup 22 fl oz?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 22 fl oz bottle gives about 31 servings, using a 1 tablespoon serving size. That is roughly a month of daily strawberry milk for one person, or a couple of weeks in a busier home. Multipacks help if you want spare bottles.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Nesquik Strawberry Syrup have artificial colors or high fructose corn syrup?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The label states there are no artificial colors, with color coming from natural sources like beet powder, and no high fructose corn syrup. The ingredients also include sugar, water, malic acid, natural flavor and a preservative. Read the panel on the bottle for the current formula.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I make strawberry milk with Nesquik Strawberry Syrup?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Squeeze the syrup into a glass of cold milk and stir until blended. Use a little more for a stronger strawberry taste or less for a lighter one. It also works as a drizzle over ice cream, pancakes, waffles and other desserts for a fruity finish.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Nesquik Strawberry Syrup are available?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Order a Single 22 fl oz bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. One bottle is enough to try it, while packs fit families, school or daycare kitchens, dessert counters and cafés that serve flavored milk regularly.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nestlé Nesquik","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604399784150,"sku":"NESQUIK-STRAWSYRUP-22OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604399816918,"sku":"NESQUIK-STRAWSYRUP-22OZ-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604399849686,"sku":"NESQUIK-STRAWSYRUP-22OZ-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/nqs.jpg?v=1791993085"},{"product_id":"nestle-nesquik-chocolate-syrup-22-fl-oz","title":"Nestlé Nesquik Syrup, Chocolate, 22 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eNestlé Nesquik Chocolate Syrup comes in a 22 fl oz easy-squeeze bottle with the familiar Nesquik chocolate flavor and no high fructose corn syrup, according to the label. It stirs into milk or drizzles over ice cream and desserts, with about 31 servings per bottle. Choose a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat to know about Nesquik Chocolate Syrup\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e22 fl oz easy-squeeze bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eClassic Nesquik chocolate flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo high fructose corn syrup, per the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAbout 31 servings per bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e50 calories per 1 tablespoon serving, per the label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMixes into cold or hot milk without clumping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Mix\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSqueeze about 2 teaspoons of syrup into 1 cup of cold or hot milk and stir. It can also be drizzled over ice cream, pancakes or waffles. After opening, store the bottle upright in the pantry and check the printed label for the manufacturer's current storage guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nesquik\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNesquik is made by Nestlé, one of the world's largest food and beverage companies, and it has been part of family breakfast and snack routines for decades. The brand is best known for chocolate and strawberry milk powders and syrups sold in grocery stores across the US and Canada.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow big is the Nesquik Chocolate Syrup bottle and how many servings does it hold?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is a 22 fl oz squeeze bottle with about 31 servings, based on a 1 tablespoon serving. That is close to a month of daily chocolate milk for one person, or a couple of weeks in a household that drinks it often. Multipacks let you stock up.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nesquik Chocolate Syrup contain high fructose corn syrup or artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe label says there is no high fructose corn syrup. The ingredient list, however, includes artificial flavor, caramel color and color additives, along with sugar, water and cocoa. Read the full ingredient panel on the bottle to confirm the current formula before serving.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I use Nesquik Chocolate Syrup?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAdd about 2 teaspoons to a cup of cold or hot milk and stir until blended. You can also pour it over ice cream, pancakes, waffles or other desserts. Adjust the amount for a lighter or richer chocolate taste, and note each tablespoon is 50 calories on its own.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Nesquik Chocolate Syrup can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can order one 22 fl oz bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. A single bottle suits a household trying it. Packs are handy for cafés, school kitchens, dessert counters and families who go through chocolate milk quickly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How big is the Nesquik Chocolate Syrup bottle and how many servings does it hold?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is a 22 fl oz squeeze bottle with about 31 servings, based on a 1 tablespoon serving. That is close to a month of daily chocolate milk for one person, or a couple of weeks in a household that drinks it often. Multipacks let you stock up.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Nesquik Chocolate Syrup contain high fructose corn syrup or artificial ingredients?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The label says there is no high fructose corn syrup. The ingredient list, however, includes artificial flavor, caramel color and color additives, along with sugar, water and cocoa. Read the full ingredient panel on the bottle to confirm the current formula before serving.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I use Nesquik Chocolate Syrup?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Add about 2 teaspoons to a cup of cold or hot milk and stir until blended. You can also pour it over ice cream, pancakes, waffles or other desserts. Adjust the amount for a lighter or richer chocolate taste, and note each tablespoon is 50 calories on its own.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Nesquik Chocolate Syrup can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can order one 22 fl oz bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. A single bottle suits a household trying it. Packs are handy for cafés, school kitchens, dessert counters and families who go through chocolate milk quickly.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nestlé Nesquik","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604399882454,"sku":"NESQUIK-CHOCSYRUP-22OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604399915222,"sku":"NESQUIK-CHOCSYRUP-22OZ-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604399947990,"sku":"NESQUIK-CHOCSYRUP-22OZ-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/nqc.jpg?v=1791993084"},{"product_id":"local-weather-premium-sports-drink-mango-passionfruit-16-fl-oz-bottle","title":"Local Weather Sports Drink, Mango Passionfruit, 16 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eLocal Weather Mango Passionfruit Premium Sports Drink is a 16 fl oz non-carbonated bottle that takes its flavor from mango juice concentrate, with coconut water and Himalayan pink salt behind the electrolytes. Each bottle lists 35 calories. It ships from our US warehouse as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, which suits gym bags, office fridges, team coolers and household stock-ups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat sets Local Weather Mango Passionfruit apart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: Mango Passionfruit, made with mango juice concentrate and no artificial colors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSize: one 16 fl oz (473 mL) recyclable aluminum bottle per unit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e35 calories per bottle, with 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eElectrolyte base of coconut water concentrate and Himalayan pink salt, plus added potassium and magnesium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeine-free, with no stimulants in the ingredient list\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabeled gluten-free and vegan, and it contains coconut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShake the bottle well before opening, then drink it cold or at cool room temperature. It works after a game or a long walk, beside a packed lunch, or whenever you want a tropical-leaning bottle. Keep unopened bottles in a cool pantry, and check the label first if anyone has a coconut allergy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Local Weather\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eLocal Weather makes non-carbonated sports drinks built around electrolyte hydration, using coconut water and Himalayan pink salt instead of heavy sugar loads. The range is sold in several fruit flavors, each one taking its taste from real juice concentrate, and every bottle uses the same 16 fl oz recyclable aluminum format, so mixing flavors in one order is easy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Local Weather Mango Passionfruit sports drink gluten-free and vegan?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe label describes it as gluten-free and vegan, made without gluten or animal-derived ingredients. It does contain coconut, so anyone with a coconut allergy should check the printed ingredient panel first. Recipes and facility notes can change between production runs, so read the label on the bottle in your hand before serving guests.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Local Weather Mango Passionfruit?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eShake the bottle well because the contents can settle, and serve it cold for the most refreshing drink. Unopened bottles keep best in a cool pantry away from direct sunlight, and you can chill a few ahead of a game or event. Check the printed date on the bottle and refrigerate anything you plan to finish later.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Local Weather Mango Passionfruit taste like and how much sugar does it have?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is a non-carbonated sports drink flavored with mango juice concentrate, so expect a fruit-forward, lightly sweet taste rather than a sticky one. Each 16 fl oz bottle lists 35 calories and 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added, which the brand positions as a lower-sugar option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Local Weather Mango Passionfruit can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can choose a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6, all in the same 16 fl oz size. Multipacks are handy for a gym locker, an office fridge, a youth sports team cooler or a household pantry, and larger counts make it easier to keep several flavors in rotation without reordering often.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Local Weather Mango Passionfruit sports drink gluten-free and vegan?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The label describes it as gluten-free and vegan, made without gluten or animal-derived ingredients. It does contain coconut, so anyone with a coconut allergy should check the printed ingredient panel first. Recipes and facility notes can change between production runs, so read the label on the bottle in your hand before serving guests.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Local Weather Mango Passionfruit?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Shake the bottle well because the contents can settle, and serve it cold for the most refreshing drink. Unopened bottles keep best in a cool pantry away from direct sunlight, and you can chill a few ahead of a game or event. Check the printed date on the bottle and refrigerate anything you plan to finish later.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Local Weather Mango Passionfruit taste like and how much sugar does it have?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is a non-carbonated sports drink flavored with mango juice concentrate, so expect a fruit-forward, lightly sweet taste rather than a sticky one. Each 16 fl oz bottle lists 35 calories and 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added, which the brand positions as a lower-sugar option.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Local Weather Mango Passionfruit can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can choose a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6, all in the same 16 fl oz size. Multipacks are handy for a gym locker, an office fridge, a youth sports team cooler or a household pantry, and larger counts make it easier to keep several flavors in rotation without reordering often.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Local Weather","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604399980758,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-MANGOPASSION-16OZ-SINGLE","price":3.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604400013526,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-MANGOPASSION-16OZ-PK3","price":10.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604400046294,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-MANGOPASSION-16OZ-PK6","price":20.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/mango_pass_1-lcEUJs.jpg?v=1791993085"},{"product_id":"local-weather-premium-sports-drink-orange-clementine-16-fl-oz-bottle","title":"Local Weather Sports Drink, Orange Clementine, 16 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eLocal Weather Orange Clementine Premium Sports Drink is a 16 fl oz non-carbonated bottle that takes its flavor from tangerine juice concentrate, with coconut water and Himalayan pink salt behind the electrolytes. Each bottle lists 35 calories. It ships from our US warehouse as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, which suits gym bags, office fridges, team coolers and household stock-ups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat sets Local Weather Orange Clementine apart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: Orange Clementine, made with tangerine juice concentrate and no artificial colors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSize: one 16 fl oz (473 mL) recyclable aluminum bottle per unit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e35 calories per bottle, with 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eElectrolyte base of coconut water concentrate and Himalayan pink salt, plus added potassium and magnesium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeine-free, with no stimulants in the ingredient list\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabeled gluten-free and vegan, and it contains coconut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShake the bottle well before opening, then drink it cold or at cool room temperature. It suits a gym session, a school sports day, a desk break, or any moment when a citrus bottle sounds better than soda. Keep unopened bottles in a cool pantry, and check the label first if anyone has a coconut allergy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Local Weather\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eLocal Weather makes non-carbonated sports drinks built around electrolyte hydration, using coconut water and Himalayan pink salt instead of heavy sugar loads. The range is sold in several fruit flavors, each one taking its taste from real juice concentrate, and every bottle uses the same 16 fl oz recyclable aluminum format, so mixing flavors in one order is easy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Local Weather Orange Clementine sports drink gluten-free and vegan?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe label describes it as gluten-free and vegan, made without gluten or animal-derived ingredients. It does contain coconut, so anyone with a coconut allergy should check the printed ingredient panel first. Recipes and facility notes can change between production runs, so read the label on the bottle in your hand before serving guests.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Local Weather Orange Clementine?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eShake the bottle well because the contents can settle, and serve it cold for the most refreshing drink. Unopened bottles keep best in a cool pantry away from direct sunlight, and you can chill a few ahead of a game or event. Check the printed date on the bottle and refrigerate anything you plan to finish later.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Local Weather Orange Clementine taste like and how much sugar does it have?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is a non-carbonated sports drink flavored with tangerine juice concentrate, so expect a fruit-forward, lightly sweet taste rather than a sticky one. Each 16 fl oz bottle lists 35 calories and 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added, which the brand positions as a lower-sugar option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Local Weather Orange Clementine can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can choose a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6, all in the same 16 fl oz size. Multipacks are handy for a gym locker, an office fridge, a youth sports team cooler or a household pantry, and larger counts make it easier to keep several flavors in rotation without reordering often.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Local Weather Orange Clementine sports drink gluten-free and vegan?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The label describes it as gluten-free and vegan, made without gluten or animal-derived ingredients. It does contain coconut, so anyone with a coconut allergy should check the printed ingredient panel first. Recipes and facility notes can change between production runs, so read the label on the bottle in your hand before serving guests.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Local Weather Orange Clementine?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Shake the bottle well because the contents can settle, and serve it cold for the most refreshing drink. Unopened bottles keep best in a cool pantry away from direct sunlight, and you can chill a few ahead of a game or event. Check the printed date on the bottle and refrigerate anything you plan to finish later.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Local Weather Orange Clementine taste like and how much sugar does it have?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is a non-carbonated sports drink flavored with tangerine juice concentrate, so expect a fruit-forward, lightly sweet taste rather than a sticky one. Each 16 fl oz bottle lists 35 calories and 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added, which the brand positions as a lower-sugar option.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Local Weather Orange Clementine can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can choose a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6, all in the same 16 fl oz size. Multipacks are handy for a gym locker, an office fridge, a youth sports team cooler or a household pantry, and larger counts make it easier to keep several flavors in rotation without reordering often.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Local Weather","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604400079062,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-ORANGECLEM-16OZ-SINGLE","price":3.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604400111830,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-ORANGECLEM-16OZ-PK3","price":10.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604400144598,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-ORANGECLEM-16OZ-PK6","price":20.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/850020363322_hbyexzubqqbgzscm.jpg?v=1791993085"},{"product_id":"local-weather-premium-sports-drink-fruit-punch-16-fl-oz-bottle","title":"Local Weather Sports Drink, Fruit Punch, 16 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eLocal Weather Fruit Punch Premium Sports Drink is a 16 fl oz non-carbonated bottle that takes its flavor from strawberry juice concentrate, with coconut water and Himalayan pink salt behind the electrolytes. Each bottle lists 35 calories. It ships from our US warehouse as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, which suits gym bags, office fridges, team coolers and household stock-ups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat sets Local Weather Fruit Punch apart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: Fruit Punch, made with strawberry juice concentrate and no artificial colors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSize: one 16 fl oz (473 mL) recyclable aluminum bottle per unit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e35 calories per bottle, with 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eElectrolyte base of coconut water concentrate and Himalayan pink salt, plus added potassium and magnesium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeine-free, with no stimulants in the ingredient list\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabeled gluten-free and vegan, and it contains coconut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShake the bottle well before opening, then drink it cold or at cool room temperature. It fits before or after a workout, on a warm afternoon, or any time you want something lighter than a classic sports drink. Keep unopened bottles in a cool pantry, and check the label first if anyone in your group has a coconut allergy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Local Weather\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eLocal Weather makes non-carbonated sports drinks built around electrolyte hydration, using coconut water and Himalayan pink salt instead of heavy sugar loads. The range is sold in several fruit flavors, each one taking its taste from real juice concentrate, and every bottle uses the same 16 fl oz recyclable aluminum format, so mixing flavors in one order is easy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Local Weather Fruit Punch sports drink gluten-free and vegan?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe label describes it as gluten-free and vegan, made without gluten or animal-derived ingredients. It does contain coconut, so anyone with a coconut allergy should check the printed ingredient panel first. Recipes and facility notes can change between production runs, so read the label on the bottle in your hand before serving guests.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Local Weather Fruit Punch?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eShake the bottle well because the contents can settle, and serve it cold for the most refreshing drink. Unopened bottles keep best in a cool pantry away from direct sunlight, and you can chill a few ahead of a game or event. Check the printed date on the bottle and refrigerate anything you plan to finish later.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Local Weather Fruit Punch taste like and how much sugar does it have?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is a non-carbonated sports drink flavored with strawberry juice concentrate, so expect a fruit-forward, lightly sweet taste rather than a sticky one. Each 16 fl oz bottle lists 35 calories and 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added, which the brand positions as a lower-sugar option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Local Weather Fruit Punch can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can choose a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6, all in the same 16 fl oz size. Multipacks are handy for a gym locker, an office fridge, a youth sports team cooler or a household pantry, and larger counts make it easier to keep several flavors in rotation without reordering often.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Local Weather Fruit Punch sports drink gluten-free and vegan?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The label describes it as gluten-free and vegan, made without gluten or animal-derived ingredients. It does contain coconut, so anyone with a coconut allergy should check the printed ingredient panel first. Recipes and facility notes can change between production runs, so read the label on the bottle in your hand before serving guests.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Local Weather Fruit Punch?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Shake the bottle well because the contents can settle, and serve it cold for the most refreshing drink. Unopened bottles keep best in a cool pantry away from direct sunlight, and you can chill a few ahead of a game or event. Check the printed date on the bottle and refrigerate anything you plan to finish later.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Local Weather Fruit Punch taste like and how much sugar does it have?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is a non-carbonated sports drink flavored with strawberry juice concentrate, so expect a fruit-forward, lightly sweet taste rather than a sticky one. Each 16 fl oz bottle lists 35 calories and 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added, which the brand positions as a lower-sugar option.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Local Weather Fruit Punch can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can choose a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6, all in the same 16 fl oz size. Multipacks are handy for a gym locker, an office fridge, a youth sports team cooler or a household pantry, and larger counts make it easier to keep several flavors in rotation without reordering often.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Local Weather","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604400210134,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-FRUITPUNCH-16OZ-SINGLE","price":3.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604400242902,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-FRUITPUNCH-16OZ-PK3","price":10.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604400275670,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-FRUITPUNCH-16OZ-PK6","price":20.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/850020363353_wbb3wemdhc4wv3sw.jpg?v=1791993087"},{"product_id":"local-weather-premium-sports-drink-wildberry-16-fl-oz-bottle","title":"Local Weather Sports Drink, Wildberry, 16 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eLocal Weather Wildberry Premium Sports Drink is a 16 fl oz non-carbonated bottle that takes its flavor from blueberry juice concentrate, with coconut water and Himalayan pink salt behind the electrolytes. Each bottle lists 35 calories. It ships from our US warehouse as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, which suits gym bags, office fridges, team coolers and household stock-ups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat sets Local Weather Wildberry apart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: Wildberry, made with blueberry juice concentrate and no artificial colors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSize: one 16 fl oz (473 mL) recyclable aluminum bottle per unit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e35 calories per bottle, with 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eElectrolyte base of coconut water concentrate and Himalayan pink salt, plus added potassium and magnesium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeine-free, with no stimulants in the ingredient list\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabeled gluten-free and vegan, and it contains coconut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShake the bottle well before opening, then drink it cold or at cool room temperature. It is an easy pick for a run, a hike, a team cooler, or an afternoon when you want a berry flavor. Keep unopened bottles in a cool pantry, and check the label first if anyone has a coconut allergy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Local Weather\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eLocal Weather makes non-carbonated sports drinks built around electrolyte hydration, using coconut water and Himalayan pink salt instead of heavy sugar loads. The range is sold in several fruit flavors, each one taking its taste from real juice concentrate, and every bottle uses the same 16 fl oz recyclable aluminum format, so mixing flavors in one order is easy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Local Weather Wildberry sports drink gluten-free and vegan?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe label describes it as gluten-free and vegan, made without gluten or animal-derived ingredients. It does contain coconut, so anyone with a coconut allergy should check the printed ingredient panel first. Recipes and facility notes can change between production runs, so read the label on the bottle in your hand before serving guests.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Local Weather Wildberry?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eShake the bottle well because the contents can settle, and serve it cold for the most refreshing drink. Unopened bottles keep best in a cool pantry away from direct sunlight, and you can chill a few ahead of a game or event. Check the printed date on the bottle and refrigerate anything you plan to finish later.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Local Weather Wildberry taste like and how much sugar does it have?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is a non-carbonated sports drink flavored with blueberry juice concentrate, so expect a fruit-forward, lightly sweet taste rather than a sticky one. Each 16 fl oz bottle lists 35 calories and 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added, which the brand positions as a lower-sugar option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Local Weather Wildberry can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can choose a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6, all in the same 16 fl oz size. Multipacks are handy for a gym locker, an office fridge, a youth sports team cooler or a household pantry, and larger counts make it easier to keep several flavors in rotation without reordering often.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Local Weather Wildberry sports drink gluten-free and vegan?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The label describes it as gluten-free and vegan, made without gluten or animal-derived ingredients. It does contain coconut, so anyone with a coconut allergy should check the printed ingredient panel first. Recipes and facility notes can change between production runs, so read the label on the bottle in your hand before serving guests.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Local Weather Wildberry?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Shake the bottle well because the contents can settle, and serve it cold for the most refreshing drink. Unopened bottles keep best in a cool pantry away from direct sunlight, and you can chill a few ahead of a game or event. Check the printed date on the bottle and refrigerate anything you plan to finish later.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Local Weather Wildberry taste like and how much sugar does it have?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is a non-carbonated sports drink flavored with blueberry juice concentrate, so expect a fruit-forward, lightly sweet taste rather than a sticky one. Each 16 fl oz bottle lists 35 calories and 6 g of cane sugar, 5 g of it added, which the brand positions as a lower-sugar option.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Local Weather Wildberry can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can choose a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6, all in the same 16 fl oz size. Multipacks are handy for a gym locker, an office fridge, a youth sports team cooler or a household pantry, and larger counts make it easier to keep several flavors in rotation without reordering often.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Local Weather","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604400308438,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-WILDBERRY-16OZ-SINGLE","price":3.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604400341206,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-WILDBERRY-16OZ-PK3","price":10.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604400373974,"sku":"LOCALWEATHER-WILDBERRY-16OZ-PK6","price":20.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/850020363315_bsbuzqrppagvfmcx.jpg?v=1791993088"},{"product_id":"nixie-sparkling-water-grapefruit-tangerine-12-fl-oz-can-0-calories-usda-organic","title":"Nixie Sparkling Water Grapefruit Tangerine, USDA Organic, 12 fl oz Can","description":"\u003cp\u003eNixie Grapefruit Tangerine Sparkling Water is a 12 fl oz (355 mL) can of USDA Organic sparkling water with zero calories, zero sugar and no caffeine. Grapefruit leads with a little zing and tangerine follows with a smoother finish. Pick a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 10, which suits home fridges, offices and party coolers. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrapefruit Tangerine flavor: grapefruit zing followed by a smoother, sweeter tangerine finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) aluminum can, BPA-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eZero calories, zero sugar and caffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUSDA Organic certified flavoring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-GMO Project Verified, with no sweeteners of any kind\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVegan, gluten-free and OU Kosher certified\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eServe cold, straight from the can or poured over ice. Add citrus slices for a brunch mocktail, or use it as a light mixer with spirits. Store unopened cans at room temperature or chilled, away from sunlight, and finish an opened can within a few hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nixie\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNixie is a US-based sparkling water brand built around a short ingredient list of carbonated water and organic flavors, with no sweeteners of any kind added. The cans are BPA-free aluminum, and this flavor is USDA Organic certified, so it fits easily into a pantry, office fridge or party cooler.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine Sparkling Water contain caffeine or sweeteners?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo caffeine. Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine lists carbonated water and organic grapefruit tangerine flavor, and it carries no sugar, stevia, erythritol or artificial sweeteners. That makes it an easy choice for evenings and for people avoiding caffeine. Check the printed can label for the full, current ingredient statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine cans?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened cans at room temperature or in the refrigerator, away from direct sun and freezing temperatures. Chill them well before serving, since cold cans taste crisper and hold their fizz better. After opening, finish the can within a few hours because the carbonation fades once the seal is broken.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine taste?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eGrapefruit opens with a little zing, then tangerine follows with a smoother, sweeter finish. The can has no sugar or other sweeteners, so the rounded citrus effect comes from organic flavoring. Serve it well chilled, straight from the can or over ice, to get the brightest citrus flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNixie Grapefruit Tangerine is offered as a Single can, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 and a Pack of 10. A single can is enough to test the flavor. The larger packs fit office fridges, café coolers, parties and households that drink sparkling water daily.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine Sparkling Water contain caffeine or sweeteners?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"No caffeine. Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine lists carbonated water and organic grapefruit tangerine flavor, and it carries no sugar, stevia, erythritol or artificial sweeteners. That makes it an easy choice for evenings and for people avoiding caffeine. Check the printed can label for the full, current ingredient statement.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I store and serve Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine cans?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Keep unopened cans at room temperature or in the refrigerator, away from direct sun and freezing temperatures. Chill them well before serving, since cold cans taste crisper and hold their fizz better. After opening, finish the can within a few hours because the carbonation fades once the seal is broken.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine taste?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Grapefruit opens with a little zing, then tangerine follows with a smoother, sweeter finish. The can has no sugar or other sweeteners, so the rounded citrus effect comes from organic flavoring. Serve it well chilled, straight from the can or over ice, to get the brightest citrus flavor.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Nixie Grapefruit Tangerine is offered as a Single can, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 and a Pack of 10. A single can is enough to test the flavor. The larger packs fit office fridges, café coolers, parties and households that drink sparkling water daily.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nixie","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604400439510,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-GRAPEFRUITTANGERINE-12OZ-SINGLE","price":1.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604400472278,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-GRAPEFRUITTANGERINE-12OZ-PK3","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604400505046,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-GRAPEFRUITTANGERINE-12OZ-PK6","price":10.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 10","offer_id":67604400537814,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-GRAPEFRUITTANGERINE-12OZ-PK10","price":17.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/Untitleddesign-59_727ef788-3201-488e-a698-201067a27a2f.png?v=1792861112"},{"product_id":"nixie-sparkling-water-blackberry-raspberry-12-fl-oz-can-0-calories-usda-organic","title":"Nixie Sparkling Water Blackberry Raspberry, USDA Organic, 12 fl oz Can","description":"\u003cp\u003eNixie Blackberry Raspberry Sparkling Water is a 12 fl oz (355 mL) can of USDA Organic sparkling water with zero calories, zero sugar and no caffeine. The blend leans on tart raspberry balanced by sweeter blackberry. Pick a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 10, which suits home fridges, offices and party coolers. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Nixie Blackberry Raspberry\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlackberry Raspberry flavor: tart raspberry balanced by sweeter blackberry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) aluminum can, BPA-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eZero calories, zero sugar and caffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUSDA Organic certified flavoring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-GMO Project Verified, with no sweeteners of any kind\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVegan, gluten-free and OU Kosher certified\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eServe cold, straight from the can or poured over ice. A splash of extra sparkling water and some berries makes a quick mocktail, and it can also be used as a mixer with spirits. Store unopened cans at room temperature or chilled, away from sunlight, and finish an opened can within a few hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nixie\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNixie is a US-based sparkling water brand built around a short ingredient list of carbonated water and organic flavors, with no sweeteners of any kind added. The cans are BPA-free aluminum, and this flavor is USDA Organic certified, so it fits easily into a pantry, office fridge or party cooler.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nixie Blackberry Raspberry Sparkling Water contain caffeine or sweeteners?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo caffeine. Nixie Blackberry Raspberry lists carbonated water and organic blackberry raspberry flavor, and it carries no sugar, stevia, erythritol or artificial sweeteners. That makes it an easy choice for evenings and for people avoiding caffeine. Check the printed can label for the full, current ingredient statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve Nixie Blackberry Raspberry cans?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened cans at room temperature or in the refrigerator, away from direct sun and freezing temperatures. Chill them well before serving, since cold cans taste crisper and hold their fizz better. After opening, finish the can within a few hours because the carbonation fades once the seal is broken.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the flavor of Nixie Blackberry Raspberry like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is a bold, fruit-forward blend in which tart raspberry is balanced by the sweeter notes of blackberry. There is no sugar or sweetener in the can, so the berry impression comes from organic flavoring and carbonation. Serve it well chilled, or add berries and extra bubbles for a simple mocktail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Nixie Blackberry Raspberry can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNixie Blackberry Raspberry is offered as a Single can, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 and a Pack of 10. A single can is enough to test the flavor. The larger packs fit office fridges, café coolers, parties and households that drink sparkling water daily.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Nixie Blackberry Raspberry Sparkling Water contain caffeine or sweeteners?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"No caffeine. Nixie Blackberry Raspberry lists carbonated water and organic blackberry raspberry flavor, and it carries no sugar, stevia, erythritol or artificial sweeteners. That makes it an easy choice for evenings and for people avoiding caffeine. Check the printed can label for the full, current ingredient statement.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I store and serve Nixie Blackberry Raspberry cans?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Keep unopened cans at room temperature or in the refrigerator, away from direct sun and freezing temperatures. Chill them well before serving, since cold cans taste crisper and hold their fizz better. After opening, finish the can within a few hours because the carbonation fades once the seal is broken.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the flavor of Nixie Blackberry Raspberry like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is a bold, fruit-forward blend in which tart raspberry is balanced by the sweeter notes of blackberry. There is no sugar or sweetener in the can, so the berry impression comes from organic flavoring and carbonation. Serve it well chilled, or add berries and extra bubbles for a simple mocktail.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Nixie Blackberry Raspberry can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Nixie Blackberry Raspberry is offered as a Single can, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 and a Pack of 10. A single can is enough to test the flavor. The larger packs fit office fridges, café coolers, parties and households that drink sparkling water daily.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nixie","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604400570582,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-BLKRASP-12OZ-SINGLE","price":1.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604400603350,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-BLKRASP-12OZ-PK3","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604400636118,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-BLKRASP-12OZ-PK6","price":10.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 10","offer_id":67604400668886,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-BLKRASP-12OZ-PK10","price":17.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/Untitleddesign-58_fef5a9f7-b84c-40f3-9f8d-cf3fc6b105ee.png?v=1792861113"},{"product_id":"nixie-sparkling-water-pomegranate-green-tea-12-fl-oz-can-0-calories-usda-organic","title":"Nixie Sparkling Water Pomegranate Green Tea, USDA Organic, 12 fl oz Can","description":"\u003cp\u003eNixie Sparkling Water Pomegranate Green Tea is a 12 fl oz (355 mL) can of USDA Organic, zero-calorie sparkling water with a sweet-tart pomegranate flavor and a mild green tea note. Each can carries 15 mg of caffeine from organic green tea. It comes as a single can or in packs of 3, 6 and 10, suits home fridges, offices and small cafés, and ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Nixie Pomegranate Green Tea\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: sweet-tart pomegranate with a soft, earthy green tea finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSize: 12 fl oz (355 mL) BPA-free aluminum can\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eZero calories, with no sugar, stevia or erythritol added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeine: 15 mg per can, sourced from organic green tea\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUSDA Organic and Non-GMO Project Verified; vegan, gluten free and OU kosher\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIngredients: carbonated water and organic pomegranate green tea flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the cans thoroughly and pour over ice in a tall glass, or drink straight from the can. For a quick mocktail, add a splash of plain sparkling water and a few fruit slices, or use it as a light mixer with spirits. Keep unopened cans away from direct sun and finish an opened can within a few hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nixie\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNixie is a US sparkling water brand built around a short ingredient list: carbonated water plus organic flavors, with no added sugar, sodium or artificial sweeteners. Its flavors are USDA Organic certified and Non-GMO Project Verified, and the cans are BPA-free aluminum. This pomegranate green tea flavor is one of the zero-calorie options in the range.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow much caffeine is in Nixie Pomegranate Green Tea sparkling water?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEach 12 fl oz can contains 15 mg of caffeine, taken from organic green tea rather than a synthetic additive. That is roughly half of what a brewed cup of tea provides. If you are sensitive to caffeine, pregnant or tracking your intake, read the printed label and ask your doctor how it fits.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve Nixie Pomegranate Green Tea cans?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened cans at room temperature or in the refrigerator, away from direct sunlight and from freezing temperatures. Serve them well chilled, either from the can or poured over ice. Once a can is open, drink it within a few hours, because the carbonation and flavor fade quickly after the seal is broken.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Nixie Pomegranate Green Tea taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe flavor leads with sweet-tart pomegranate and finishes with a mild, earthy green tea note. It contains no sweeteners of any kind, so the sweetness comes only from the flavor itself. The ingredient list is short, just carbonated water and organic pomegranate green tea flavor, and the can also carries a little caffeine from green tea.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Nixie Pomegranate Green Tea can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThis sparkling water is offered as a single can or as a pack of 3, 6 or 10. A single can is handy for trying the flavor, while the larger packs suit an office fridge, a café cooler or a household that drinks it daily. Every size uses the same 12 fl oz can.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How much caffeine is in Nixie Pomegranate Green Tea sparkling water?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Each 12 fl oz can contains 15 mg of caffeine, taken from organic green tea rather than a synthetic additive. That is roughly half of what a brewed cup of tea provides. If you are sensitive to caffeine, pregnant or tracking your intake, read the printed label and ask your doctor how it fits.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I store and serve Nixie Pomegranate Green Tea cans?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Keep unopened cans at room temperature or in the refrigerator, away from direct sunlight and from freezing temperatures. Serve them well chilled, either from the can or poured over ice. Once a can is open, drink it within a few hours, because the carbonation and flavor fade quickly after the seal is broken.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Nixie Pomegranate Green Tea taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The flavor leads with sweet-tart pomegranate and finishes with a mild, earthy green tea note. It contains no sweeteners of any kind, so the sweetness comes only from the flavor itself. The ingredient list is short, just carbonated water and organic pomegranate green tea flavor, and the can also carries a little caffeine from green tea.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Nixie Pomegranate Green Tea can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"This sparkling water is offered as a single can or as a pack of 3, 6 or 10. A single can is handy for trying the flavor, while the larger packs suit an office fridge, a café cooler or a household that drinks it daily. Every size uses the same 12 fl oz can.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nixie","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604400701654,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-POMGREENTEA-12OZ-SINGLE","price":1.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604400734422,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-POMGREENTEA-12OZ-PK3","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604400767190,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-POMGREENTEA-12OZ-PK6","price":10.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 10","offer_id":67604400799958,"sku":"NIXIE-SPARK-POMGREENTEA-12OZ-PK10","price":17.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/PomegranateGreenTea.png?v=1791993089"},{"product_id":"master-of-mixes-handcrafted-espresso-cocktail-mixer-1l-33-8-fl-oz-non-gmo-gluten-free","title":"Master of Mixes Espresso Cocktail Mixer, Non-GMO, 1 L Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eMaster of Mixes Handcrafted Espresso Cocktail Mixer is a 33.8 fl oz (1 L) bottle of non-alcoholic coffee mixer made with espresso, cane sugar and filtered water. It is the base for an Espresso Martini, an Espresso Latte Cocktail or a Cafe Old Fashioned. It ships from our US warehouse as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 for home bars, cafés and event bars.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMaster of Mixes Espresso Mixer, key facts\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecipe: espresso, water and cane sugar with natural flavor, for a bold coffee base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with cane sugar and made without high-fructose corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabeled Non-GMO, gluten free and kosher\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAbout eleven 2 fl oz (60 mL) servings per bottle, each listing 50 calories and 13 g carbohydrate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContains sulfites: sodium metabisulfite is used as an antioxidant\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSize: 33.8 fl oz (1 L) bottle, made in the USA\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Mix\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShake the bottle well. For an Espresso Martini, shake 1.5 oz vodka with 2 oz of the mixer over ice and strain into a martini glass. Use coffee liqueur and half and half for an Espresso Latte Cocktail, or bourbon and simple syrup for a Cafe Old Fashioned. Refrigerate after opening.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Master of Mixes\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMaster of Mixes is a cocktail mixer brand from American Beverage Marketers, an Indiana company. Its handcrafted range is made for bartenders and home hosts who want consistent results without building every drink from scratch. The Espresso mixer provides a coffee and cane sugar base that goes straight into the shaker for after-dinner drinks.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Master of Mixes Espresso Cocktail Mixer gluten free and kosher?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe bottle prints Non-GMO, gluten free and kosher claims. It also contains sulfites, because sodium metabisulfite is used as an antioxidant. Anyone sensitive to sulfites or following a strict diet should read the printed label on the bottle they receive, since ingredients and claims can change.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I make an Espresso Martini with Master of Mixes Espresso Mixer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eShake the bottle, then add 1.5 oz vodka and 2 oz of the mixer to an ice-filled shaker. Shake hard and strain into a martini glass. For other drinks, use coffee liqueur and half and half for a latte-style cocktail, or bourbon and simple syrup for a Cafe Old Fashioned.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Master of Mixes Espresso Mixer contain alcohol, and how many drinks per bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo, the mixer itself is non-alcoholic, so the alcohol comes from the spirit you add. A 33.8 fl oz bottle holds about eleven 2 fl oz servings. Keep the unopened bottle in a cool, dry pantry and refrigerate it after opening. Check the label for caffeine details.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Master of Mixes Espresso Mixer can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eChoose a Single 1 L bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. One bottle fits a home gathering, while multipacks suit cafés, restaurants, caterers and bars that serve espresso cocktails often and want several bottles on the shelf instead of reordering mid-service.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Master of Mixes Espresso Cocktail Mixer gluten free and kosher?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The bottle prints Non-GMO, gluten free and kosher claims. It also contains sulfites, because sodium metabisulfite is used as an antioxidant. Anyone sensitive to sulfites or following a strict diet should read the printed label on the bottle they receive, since ingredients and claims can change.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I make an Espresso Martini with Master of Mixes Espresso Mixer?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Shake the bottle, then add 1.5 oz vodka and 2 oz of the mixer to an ice-filled shaker. Shake hard and strain into a martini glass. For other drinks, use coffee liqueur and half and half for a latte-style cocktail, or bourbon and simple syrup for a Cafe Old Fashioned.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Master of Mixes Espresso Mixer contain alcohol, and how many drinks per bottle?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"No, the mixer itself is non-alcoholic, so the alcohol comes from the spirit you add. A 33.8 fl oz bottle holds about eleven 2 fl oz servings. Keep the unopened bottle in a cool, dry pantry and refrigerate it after opening. Check the label for caffeine details.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Master of Mixes Espresso Mixer can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Choose a Single 1 L bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. One bottle fits a home gathering, while multipacks suit cafés, restaurants, caterers and bars that serve espresso cocktails often and want several bottles on the shelf instead of reordering mid-service.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Master of Mixes","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604400832726,"sku":"MOM-ESPRESSO-MIXER-1L-SINGLE","price":6.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604400865494,"sku":"MOM-ESPRESSO-MIXER-1L-PACK3","price":17.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604400898262,"sku":"MOM-ESPRESSO-MIXER-1L-PACK6","price":34.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/347439233-1-fr.png?v=1791993089"},{"product_id":"malta-india-low-sodium-non-alcoholic-malt-beverage-10-fl-oz-can","title":"Malta India Non-Alcoholic Malt Beverage, Low Sodium, 8 fl oz Can","description":"\u003cp\u003eMalta India Low Sodium Non-Alcoholic Malt Beverage is an 8 fl oz (236 mL) can of malt drink from Puerto Rico, lightly carbonated with a sweet, roasty taste. It contains no alcohol. It ships from our US warehouse as a Single can, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12, which suits family tables, restaurants, parties and anyone stocking a pantry with Latin and Caribbean favorites.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people stock Malta India Low Sodium\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eType: non-alcoholic malt beverage with no alcohol\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLow sodium version of the classic Malta India recipe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: rich and roasty, slightly sweet, with notes similar to molasses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightly carbonated, with a gentle fizz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProduct of Puerto Rico, brewed and canned there\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSize: 8 fl oz (236 mL) can, sold as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eServe the can well chilled, either on its own or alongside Latin American and Caribbean dishes. Unopened cans can sit in a cool pantry or go in the refrigerator ahead of guests. Once a can is opened, finish it the same day, because the carbonation fades and the flavor is best fresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Malta India\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMalta India is a non-alcoholic malt beverage from Puerto Rico that has been familiar to families there for generations. A Puerto Rico-based beverage maker brews and cans it using a malt process that does not ferment into alcohol. The low sodium version keeps the classic malty character while giving shoppers a reduced-sodium choice to keep on hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Malta India Low Sodium non-alcoholic?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, it is sold as a non-alcoholic malt beverage and the can states that it contains no alcohol. It is brewed with malt but not fermented into alcohol. For ingredients and nutrition details, including sodium, read the panel printed on the can you receive, since recipes can change.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Malta India Low Sodium?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eChill the can and serve it cold, alone or beside a hearty meal. Store unopened cans in a cool pantry or the refrigerator. Once opened, finish the drink the same day so the light carbonation and malty flavor stay fresh, and avoid leaving cans in direct sunlight or a hot car.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Malta India Low Sodium taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt tastes rich and roasty with a mild sweetness, and many people compare the depth to molasses. The carbonation is gentle rather than sharp. This low sodium edition follows the classic Malta India recipe, so it suits people who enjoy a malty, dessert-like soft drink with meals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Malta India Low Sodium are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can order a Single 8 fl oz can, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. Small packs are handy for trying it, while 12-can packs suit restaurants, cafés, offices and families who drink malt beverages regularly and prefer to buy in larger quantities.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Malta India Low Sodium non-alcoholic?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes, it is sold as a non-alcoholic malt beverage and the can states that it contains no alcohol. It is brewed with malt but not fermented into alcohol. For ingredients and nutrition details, including sodium, read the panel printed on the can you receive, since recipes can change.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Malta India Low Sodium?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Chill the can and serve it cold, alone or beside a hearty meal. Store unopened cans in a cool pantry or the refrigerator. Once opened, finish the drink the same day so the light carbonation and malty flavor stay fresh, and avoid leaving cans in direct sunlight or a hot car.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Malta India Low Sodium taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It tastes rich and roasty with a mild sweetness, and many people compare the depth to molasses. The carbonation is gentle rather than sharp. This low sodium edition follows the classic Malta India recipe, so it suits people who enjoy a malty, dessert-like soft drink with meals.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Malta India Low Sodium are available?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can order a Single 8 fl oz can, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. Small packs are handy for trying it, while 12-can packs suit restaurants, cafés, offices and families who drink malt beverages regularly and prefer to buy in larger quantities.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Malta India","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604400931030,"sku":"MALTAINDIA-LOWSODIUM-8OZ-S","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604400963798,"sku":"MALTAINDIA-LOWSODIUM-8OZ-P3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604400996566,"sku":"MALTAINDIA-LOWSODIUM-8OZ-P6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604401029334,"sku":"MALTAINDIA-LOWSODIUM-8OZ-P12","price":24.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/2c248a43-882d-49a7-851c-5dc99c65568f-retina-large.jpg?v=1791993090"},{"product_id":"starbucks-vanilla-flavored-ground-coffee-11-oz","title":"Starbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee, 11 oz Bag","description":"\u003cp\u003eStarbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee is an 11 oz (312 g) bag of Starbucks' lightest roast, blended with rich natural vanilla flavor for a smooth, balanced cup. It is made from 100 percent Arabica beans with no artificial flavors. You can order a Single bag or a Pack of 3, which suits home mornings, office kitchens and cafés. Ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Starbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee gets reordered\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLight roast, Starbucks' lightest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNatural vanilla flavor, no artificial flavors added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e100 percent Arabica beans\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorks as hot or iced coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e11 oz (312 g) bag, ground for many brewing methods\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePack options: Single and Pack of 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Brew\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse about 2 tablespoons of ground coffee per 6 oz of water, adjusting to taste, in a drip brewer, coffee press, pour-over or moka pot. For iced coffee, brew it strong and pour over a full glass of ice. Keep the bag in a cool, dry place away from heat and moisture.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Starbucks\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStarbucks opened its first store in Seattle in 1971 and is now the largest coffeehouse chain in the world. Starbucks packaged coffee for home use, including ground bags like this vanilla flavored one and K-Cup pods, is produced and distributed by Nestle under a global licensing agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Starbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee contain artificial flavors or allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe coffee is flavored with natural flavors and has no artificial flavors added. It is made from 100 percent Arabica beans. Because labels and facility notices can change between production runs, anyone with an allergy or sensitivity should read the printed label on the bag before brewing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I brew Starbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStart with about 2 tablespoons of ground coffee per 6 oz of water, then adjust for strength. It works in drip brewers, coffee presses, pour-over setups and moka pots. For iced coffee, brew it strong and pour it over a full glass of ice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Starbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt pairs a smooth vanilla note with Starbucks' lightest roast, so the cup is soft and balanced. Roasting light lets the vanilla come through clearly, and the flavor holds up whether the coffee is brewed hot or poured over ice. The vanilla comes from natural flavors only, with no artificial flavors added to the coffee.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes does Starbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee come in?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe 11 oz bag is offered as a Single and as a Pack of 3. A single bag suits trying the flavor, while the Pack of 3 helps households, offices and small cafés that serve flavored coffee regularly keep a few bags in the pantry.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Starbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee contain artificial flavors or allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The coffee is flavored with natural flavors and has no artificial flavors added. It is made from 100 percent Arabica beans. Because labels and facility notices can change between production runs, anyone with an allergy or sensitivity should read the printed label on the bag before brewing.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I brew Starbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Start with about 2 tablespoons of ground coffee per 6 oz of water, then adjust for strength. It works in drip brewers, coffee presses, pour-over setups and moka pots. For iced coffee, brew it strong and pour it over a full glass of ice.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Starbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It pairs a smooth vanilla note with Starbucks' lightest roast, so the cup is soft and balanced. Roasting light lets the vanilla come through clearly, and the flavor holds up whether the coffee is brewed hot or poured over ice. The vanilla comes from natural flavors only, with no artificial flavors added to the coffee.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What pack sizes does Starbucks Vanilla Flavored Ground Coffee come in?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 11 oz bag is offered as a Single and as a Pack of 3. A single bag suits trying the flavor, while the Pack of 3 helps households, offices and small cafés that serve flavored coffee regularly keep a few bags in the pantry.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Starbucks","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604401062102,"sku":"STARBUCKS-VANILLA-GROUND-11OZ-S","price":24.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604401094870,"sku":"STARBUCKS-VANILLA-GROUND-11OZ-P3","price":68.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/Starbucks-Arabica-Beans-Vanilla-Naturally-Flavored-Ground-Coffee-11-oz_0546461b-2c01-4852-8cde-2afeae7f7cab.2be6215dd501375852c3a732fdefcd35.jpg?v=1791993091"},{"product_id":"starbucks-dark-morning-joe-ground-coffee-12-oz","title":"Starbucks Dark Morning Joe Ground Coffee, 12 oz Bag","description":"\u003cp\u003eStarbucks Dark Morning Joe Ground Coffee is a 12 oz (340 g) bag of bold, full-bodied Gold Coast Blend, combining Asia\/Pacific and Latin American beans with a touch of dark Italian Roast. Expect baking chocolate, dried fruit and caramel notes. It comes as a Single bag or a Pack of 3 for home kitchens, offices and cafés that brew strong coffee. Ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy strong-coffee fans stock Starbucks Dark Morning Joe\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGold Coast Blend, a dark roast with a touch of Italian Roast\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNotes of baking chocolate, dried fruit and caramel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e100 percent Arabica beans, no added flavors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGround for drip brewers, French press and pour-over\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 oz (340 g) bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePack options: Single and Pack of 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Brew\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart with about 2 tablespoons of ground coffee per 6 oz of water and adjust to taste, using a drip brewer, French press or pour-over. For iced coffee, brew it strong and pour it over a full glass of ice. Keep the bag in a cool, dry place away from heat, moisture and sunlight.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Starbucks\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStarbucks opened its first store in Seattle in 1971 and is now the largest coffeehouse chain in the world. Starbucks packaged coffee sold for home use, including ground bags like this one and K-Cup pods, is produced and distributed by Nestle under a global licensing agreement. Dark Morning Joe sits in the brand's dark roast lineup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Starbucks Dark Morning Joe Ground Coffee contain allergens or flavoring?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is made from 100 percent Arabica beans with no added flavors. Production and facility notices can change between runs, so anyone with a specific allergy or sensitivity should read the printed label on the bag before brewing. The roast is dark, but the flavor comes from the beans and blend, not from added flavorings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow much Starbucks Dark Morning Joe should I use per cup?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eA good starting point is about 2 tablespoons of ground coffee per 6 oz of water, adjusted to taste. It suits drip brewers, French press and pour-over. For iced coffee, brew it strong and pour it over a full glass of ice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Starbucks Dark Morning Joe taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is a bold, full-bodied dark roast with notes of baking chocolate, dried fruit and caramel. The Gold Coast Blend mixes Asia\/Pacific and Latin American beans with a bit of dark Italian Roast, so the cup stands up well to milk and holds its flavor over ice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Starbucks Dark Morning Joe available in multipacks for an office or café?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The 12 oz bag comes as a Single or a Pack of 3. Offices and small cafés that brew dark roast daily often choose the Pack of 3 to avoid frequent restocking, while a single bag is a simple way to try it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Starbucks Dark Morning Joe Ground Coffee contain allergens or flavoring?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is made from 100 percent Arabica beans with no added flavors. Production and facility notices can change between runs, so anyone with a specific allergy or sensitivity should read the printed label on the bag before brewing. The roast is dark, but the flavor comes from the beans and blend, not from added flavorings.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How much Starbucks Dark Morning Joe should I use per cup?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"A good starting point is about 2 tablespoons of ground coffee per 6 oz of water, adjusted to taste. It suits drip brewers, French press and pour-over. For iced coffee, brew it strong and pour it over a full glass of ice.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Starbucks Dark Morning Joe taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is a bold, full-bodied dark roast with notes of baking chocolate, dried fruit and caramel. The Gold Coast Blend mixes Asia\/Pacific and Latin American beans with a bit of dark Italian Roast, so the cup stands up well to milk and holds its flavor over ice.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Starbucks Dark Morning Joe available in multipacks for an office or café?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. The 12 oz bag comes as a Single or a Pack of 3. Offices and small cafés that brew dark roast daily often choose the Pack of 3 to avoid frequent restocking, while a single bag is a simple way to try it.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Starbucks","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604401127638,"sku":"STARBUCKS-DARKMORNINGJOE-GROUND-12OZ-S","price":24.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604401160406,"sku":"STARBUCKS-DARKMORNINGJOE-GROUND-12OZ-P3","price":68.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/Starbucks-Morning-Joe-Ground-Coffee-Dark-Roast-12-oz_478cf1e1-55e2-4e03-acfb-54141291c976.71a5d19092ff93cef5c36ff8833a155a.jpg?v=1791993091"},{"product_id":"jarritos-pineapple-natural-flavor-soda-12-5-fl-oz-370ml","title":"Jarritos Pineapple Natural Flavor Soda, 12.5 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJarritos Pineapple Natural Flavor Soda in the 12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle is a lightly carbonated Mexican soda sweetened with cane sugar. It tastes juicy and tropical, finishing with a light tang. Choose a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 for a home fridge, office kitchen, taquería counter or party cooler. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jarritos Pineapple\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: juicy, tropical pineapple with a light tangy finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with cane sugar instead of high fructose corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightly carbonated Mexican soda in the classic Jarritos glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDescribed as naturally caffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBottled in Mexico and sold as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles for a few hours and open them cold, straight from the glass or poured over ice. They go well with slow-cooked or smoky dishes, where the bright tanginess lifts richer flavors. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sun, and finish an opened one the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jarritos\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJarritos is a Mexican soda brand that has been bottling fruit-flavored sodas since 1950. Its recipes rely on cane sugar and natural fruit flavors, and the soft carbonation has stayed familiar over the decades. Pineapple is juicy and tropical with a light tang, and the bottles are a common sight beside tacos, tortas and other Mexican meals across the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is in Jarritos Pineapple soda, and does it contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Pineapple is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Jarritos Pineapple?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with slow-cooked or smoky dishes, where the bright tanginess lifts richer flavors. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does Jarritos Pineapple taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePineapple is brighter and tangier than the milder Mango flavor, giving a livelier tropical note in the same lightly fizzy style. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jarritos Pineapple can I order for an office or a cafe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Pineapple comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is in Jarritos Pineapple soda, and does it contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Pineapple is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Jarritos Pineapple?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with slow-cooked or smoky dishes, where the bright tanginess lifts richer flavors. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Jarritos Pineapple taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Pineapple is brighter and tangier than the milder Mango flavor, giving a livelier tropical note in the same lightly fizzy style. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jarritos Pineapple can I order for an office or a cafe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Pineapple comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jarritos","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604401258710,"sku":"JARRITOS-PINEAPPLE-370ML-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604401291478,"sku":"JARRITOS-PINEAPPLE-370ML-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604401324246,"sku":"JARRITOS-PINEAPPLE-370ML-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/pna.jpg?v=1791993092"},{"product_id":"jarritos-mango-natural-flavor-soda-12-5-fl-oz-370ml","title":"Jarritos Mango Natural Flavor Soda, 12.5 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJarritos Mango Natural Flavor Soda in the 12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle is a lightly carbonated Mexican soda sweetened with cane sugar. It tastes tropical and mellow, with juicy mango sweetness. Choose a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 for a home fridge, office kitchen, taquería counter or party cooler. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jarritos Mango\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: smooth, tropical mango with a juicy, mellow sweetness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with cane sugar instead of high fructose corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightly carbonated Mexican soda in the classic Jarritos glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDescribed as naturally caffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBottled in Mexico and sold as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles for a few hours and open them cold, straight from the glass or poured over ice. They go well with spicy dishes, where the mellow sweetness cools the heat. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sun, and finish an opened one the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jarritos\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJarritos is a Mexican soda brand that has been bottling fruit-flavored sodas since 1950. Its recipes rely on cane sugar and natural fruit flavors, and the soft carbonation has stayed familiar over the decades. Mango is smooth and tropical with a mellow sweetness, and the bottles are a common sight beside tacos, tortas and other Mexican meals across the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is in Jarritos Mango soda, and does it contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Mango is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Jarritos Mango?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with spicy dishes, where the mellow sweetness cools the heat. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does Jarritos Mango taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMango is mellower and less tart than the citrus flavors in the lineup, which makes it an easy pick for guests who prefer softer fruit. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jarritos Mango can I order for an office or a cafe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Mango comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is in Jarritos Mango soda, and does it contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Mango is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Jarritos Mango?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with spicy dishes, where the mellow sweetness cools the heat. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Jarritos Mango taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Mango is mellower and less tart than the citrus flavors in the lineup, which makes it an easy pick for guests who prefer softer fruit. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jarritos Mango can I order for an office or a cafe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Mango comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jarritos","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604401357014,"sku":"JARRITOS-MANGO-370ML-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604401389782,"sku":"JARRITOS-MANGO-370ML-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604401422550,"sku":"JARRITOS-MANGO-370ML-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/mng.jpg?v=1791993093"},{"product_id":"jarritos-mandarin-natural-flavor-soda-12-5-fl-oz-370ml","title":"Jarritos Mandarin Natural Flavor Soda, 12.5 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJarritos Mandarin Natural Flavor Soda in the 12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle is a lightly carbonated Mexican soda sweetened with cane sugar. It tastes of bright orange citrus with a sweet mandarin zing. Choose a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 for a home fridge, office kitchen, taquería counter or party cooler. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jarritos Mandarin\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: bold, bright orange-citrus with a sweet mandarin zing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with cane sugar instead of high fructose corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightly carbonated Mexican soda in the classic Jarritos glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDescribed as naturally caffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBottled in Mexico and sold as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles for a few hours and open them cold, straight from the glass or poured over ice. They go well with savory, spiced dishes, where the sweet citrus balances the heat. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sun, and finish an opened one the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jarritos\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJarritos is a Mexican soda brand that has been bottling fruit-flavored sodas since 1950. Its recipes rely on cane sugar and natural fruit flavors, and the soft carbonation has stayed familiar over the decades. Mandarin is a bold orange-citrus soda with a sweet zing, and the bottles are a common sight beside tacos, tortas and other Mexican meals across the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is in Jarritos Mandarin soda, and does it contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Mandarin is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Jarritos Mandarin?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with savory, spiced dishes, where the sweet citrus balances the heat. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does Jarritos Mandarin taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMandarin is sweeter and rounder than the tarter Lime or Grapefruit flavors, with a clear orange-citrus character. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jarritos Mandarin can I order for an office or a cafe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Mandarin comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is in Jarritos Mandarin soda, and does it contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Mandarin is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Jarritos Mandarin?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with savory, spiced dishes, where the sweet citrus balances the heat. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Jarritos Mandarin taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Mandarin is sweeter and rounder than the tarter Lime or Grapefruit flavors, with a clear orange-citrus character. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jarritos Mandarin can I order for an office or a cafe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Mandarin comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jarritos","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604401455318,"sku":"JARRITOS-MANDARIN-370ML-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604401488086,"sku":"JARRITOS-MANDARIN-370ML-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604401520854,"sku":"JARRITOS-MANDARIN-370ML-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/mnd.jpg?v=1791993093"},{"product_id":"jarritos-grapefruit-natural-flavor-soda-12-5-fl-oz-370ml","title":"Jarritos Grapefruit Natural Flavor Soda, 12.5 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJarritos Grapefruit Natural Flavor Soda in the 12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle is a lightly carbonated Mexican soda sweetened with cane sugar. The taste is tart and tangy with a pleasant bitter edge, so it is not overly sweet. Choose a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 for a home fridge, office kitchen, taquería counter or party cooler. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jarritos Grapefruit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: tart, tangy grapefruit with a mild bitter edge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with cane sugar instead of high fructose corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightly carbonated Mexican soda in the classic Jarritos glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDescribed as naturally caffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBottled in Mexico and sold as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles for a few hours and open them cold, straight from the glass or poured over ice. They go well on their own or as a mixer, where the tartness balances sweeter ingredients. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sun, and finish an opened one the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jarritos\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJarritos is a Mexican soda brand that has been bottling fruit-flavored sodas since 1950. Its recipes rely on cane sugar and natural fruit flavors, and the soft carbonation has stayed familiar over the decades. Grapefruit is tart and tangy with a mild bitterness, and the bottles are a common sight beside tacos, tortas and other Mexican meals across the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is in Jarritos Grapefruit soda, and does it contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Grapefruit is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Jarritos Grapefruit?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it on their own or as a mixer, where the tartness balances sweeter ingredients. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does Jarritos Grapefruit taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eGrapefruit sits at the less sweet end of the lineup. Its tangy, slightly bitter profile suits people who find most sodas too sugary. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jarritos Grapefruit can I order for an office or a cafe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Grapefruit comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is in Jarritos Grapefruit soda, and does it contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Grapefruit is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Jarritos Grapefruit?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it on their own or as a mixer, where the tartness balances sweeter ingredients. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Jarritos Grapefruit taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Grapefruit sits at the less sweet end of the lineup. Its tangy, slightly bitter profile suits people who find most sodas too sugary. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jarritos Grapefruit can I order for an office or a cafe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Grapefruit comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jarritos","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604401553622,"sku":"JARRITOS-GRAPEFRUIT-370ML-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604401586390,"sku":"JARRITOS-GRAPEFRUIT-370ML-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604401619158,"sku":"JARRITOS-GRAPEFRUIT-370ML-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/gp.jpg?v=1791993094"},{"product_id":"jarritos-lime-natural-flavor-soda-12-5-fl-oz-370ml","title":"Jarritos Lime Natural Flavor Soda, 12.5 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJarritos Lime Natural Flavor Soda in the 12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle is a lightly carbonated Mexican soda sweetened with cane sugar. It has a crisp, tangy citrus pop built around lime flavor. Choose a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 for a home fridge, office kitchen, taquería counter or party cooler. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jarritos Lime\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: crisp, tangy lime with a sharp citrus finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with cane sugar instead of high fructose corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightly carbonated Mexican soda in the classic Jarritos glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDescribed as naturally caffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBottled in Mexico and sold as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles for a few hours and open them cold, straight from the glass or poured over ice. They go well with fried or spicy dishes, where the citrus cuts through heavy flavors. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sun, and finish an opened one the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jarritos\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJarritos is a Mexican soda brand that has been bottling fruit-flavored sodas since 1950. Its recipes rely on cane sugar and natural fruit flavors, and the soft carbonation has stayed familiar over the decades. Lime is crisp and tangy with a sharp citrus note, and the bottles are a common sight beside tacos, tortas and other Mexican meals across the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is in Jarritos Lime soda, and does it contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Lime is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Jarritos Lime?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with fried or spicy dishes, where the citrus cuts through heavy flavors. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does Jarritos Lime taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eLime is one of the tangiest, least sweet flavors in the lineup, sharper than fruit-forward choices like Mango or Fruit Punch. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jarritos Lime can I order for an office or a cafe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Lime comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is in Jarritos Lime soda, and does it contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Lime is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Jarritos Lime?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with fried or spicy dishes, where the citrus cuts through heavy flavors. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Jarritos Lime taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Lime is one of the tangiest, least sweet flavors in the lineup, sharper than fruit-forward choices like Mango or Fruit Punch. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jarritos Lime can I order for an office or a cafe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Lime comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jarritos","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604401651926,"sku":"JARRITOS-LIME-370ML-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604401684694,"sku":"JARRITOS-LIME-370ML-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604401717462,"sku":"JARRITOS-LIME-370ML-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/lm.jpg?v=1791993095"},{"product_id":"jarritos-fruit-punch-natural-flavor-soda-12-5-fl-oz-370ml","title":"Jarritos Fruit Punch Natural Flavor Soda, 12.5 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJarritos Fruit Punch Natural Flavor Soda in the 12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle is a lightly carbonated Mexican soda sweetened with cane sugar. Its flavor is a blend of several fruits, called Tutti Frutti in Mexico. Choose a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 for a home fridge, office kitchen, taquería counter or party cooler. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jarritos Fruit Punch\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: a mixed-fruit blend rather than one single fruit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with cane sugar instead of high fructose corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightly carbonated Mexican soda in the classic Jarritos glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDescribed as naturally caffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBottled in Mexico and sold as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles for a few hours and open them cold, straight from the glass or poured over ice. They go well with tacos and other spicy dishes, where the fruity sweetness softens the heat. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sun, and finish an opened one the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jarritos\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJarritos is a Mexican soda brand that has been bottling fruit-flavored sodas since 1950. Its recipes rely on cane sugar and natural fruit flavors, and the soft carbonation has stayed familiar over the decades. Fruit Punch is a blend of several fruit flavors known as Tutti Frutti in Mexico, and the bottles are a common sight beside tacos, tortas and other Mexican meals across the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is in Jarritos Fruit Punch soda, and does it contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Fruit Punch is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Jarritos Fruit Punch?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with tacos and other spicy dishes, where the fruity sweetness softens the heat. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does Jarritos Fruit Punch taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFruit Punch is a blend of several fruit flavors, known in Mexico as Tutti Frutti, which sets it apart from any single-fruit Jarritos. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jarritos Fruit Punch can I order for an office or a cafe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Fruit Punch comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is in Jarritos Fruit Punch soda, and does it contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Fruit Punch is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Jarritos Fruit Punch?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with tacos and other spicy dishes, where the fruity sweetness softens the heat. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Jarritos Fruit Punch taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Fruit Punch is a blend of several fruit flavors, known in Mexico as Tutti Frutti, which sets it apart from any single-fruit Jarritos. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jarritos Fruit Punch can I order for an office or a cafe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Fruit Punch comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jarritos","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604401750230,"sku":"JARRITOS-FRUITPUNCH-370ML-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604401782998,"sku":"JARRITOS-FRUITPUNCH-370ML-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604401815766,"sku":"JARRITOS-FRUITPUNCH-370ML-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/fp.jpg?v=1791993095"},{"product_id":"jarritos-strawberry-natural-flavor-soda-12-5-fl-oz-370ml","title":"Jarritos Strawberry Natural Flavor Soda, 12.5 fl oz Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eJarritos Strawberry Natural Flavor Soda in the 12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle is a lightly carbonated Mexican soda sweetened with cane sugar. It has a sweet, candy-like strawberry flavor. Choose a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 for a home fridge, office kitchen, taquería counter or party cooler. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Jarritos Strawberry\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: sweet, fruity, candy-like strawberry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with cane sugar instead of high fructose corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12.5 fl oz (370 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightly carbonated, with a softer fizz than many American sodas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDescribed as naturally caffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBottled in Mexico and sold as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles for a few hours and open them cold, straight from the glass or poured over ice. They go well with tacos, carne asada and other grilled or spicy dishes, where its sweetness balances savory flavors. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sun, and finish an opened one the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Jarritos\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eJarritos is a Mexican soda brand that has been bottling fruit-flavored sodas since 1950. Its recipes rely on cane sugar and natural fruit flavors, and the soft carbonation has stayed familiar over the decades. Strawberry is sweet and candy-like with a soft fruity taste, and the bottles are a common sight beside tacos, tortas and other Mexican meals across the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is in Jarritos Strawberry soda, and does it contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Strawberry is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Jarritos Strawberry?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with tacos, carne asada and other grilled or spicy dishes, where its sweetness balances savory flavors. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow does Jarritos Strawberry taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStrawberry is sweeter and less sharp than citrus flavors such as Mandarin or Lime, and it has a more candy-like fruitiness. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Jarritos Strawberry can I order for an office or a cafe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eJarritos Strawberry comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is in Jarritos Strawberry soda, and does it contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Strawberry is built on carbonated water, cane sugar and natural flavor, and the product details do not list milk, egg, soy or nut ingredients. Recipes can change between production runs, so anyone managing an allergy or a dietary restriction should read the printed label on the bottle first.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve and store Jarritos Strawberry?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled, either from the bottle or over ice, and pair it with tacos, carne asada and other grilled or spicy dishes, where its sweetness balances savory flavors. Store unopened glass bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight. After opening, the carbonation fades quickly, so plan to finish the bottle within the same day.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Jarritos Strawberry taste compared with other Jarritos flavors?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Strawberry is sweeter and less sharp than citrus flavors such as Mandarin or Lime, and it has a more candy-like fruitiness. Every flavor shares the same lightly carbonated style, cane sugar sweetening and glass bottle, so mixing flavors in one order works well for groups.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Jarritos Strawberry can I order for an office or a cafe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Jarritos Strawberry comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. The Single suits a quick try, while the multipacks help offices, cafes and small restaurants keep a fridge stocked and cut down on reordering for parties or weekly menus.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Jarritos","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604401848534,"sku":"JARRITOS-STRAWBERRY-370ML-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604401881302,"sku":"JARRITOS-STRAWBERRY-370ML-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604401914070,"sku":"JARRITOS-STRAWBERRY-370ML-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/Js.jpg?v=1791993096"},{"product_id":"s-pellegrino-sparkling-natural-mineral-water-750ml","title":"S.Pellegrino Sparkling Natural Mineral Water, 750 mL Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eS.Pellegrino Sparkling Natural Mineral Water in the 750ml glass bottle is a shareable Italian mineral water with added CO2 for fine, gentle bubbles. It holds about two 12 fl oz servings, each listing 0 calories and 0g sugar. Choose a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 for dinner tables, restaurants and hosted gatherings. Ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the S.Pellegrino 750ml bottle suits the table\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNatural mineral water with CO2 added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBottled at the source in the Italian Alps since 1899\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e0 calories and 0g sugar per serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAbout 60mg calcium per 12 fl oz serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e25.3 fl oz (750ml) recyclable glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePack options: Single, Pack of 3 and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottle and serve it on its own, with a meal, or as a sparkling mixer in cocktails and mocktails. Open the cap slowly because the bottle is under pressure, and pour gently to keep the bubbles fine. Recycle the empty glass bottle where facilities are available.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout S.Pellegrino\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eS.Pellegrino is one of Italy's most recognized sparkling mineral waters, sourced at San Pellegrino Terme in the foothills of the Italian Alps and bottled at the source since 1899. It is known for gentle, fine bubbles and has long been served at dining tables around the world. The 750ml glass bottle is its shareable table size.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes S.Pellegrino Sparkling Natural Mineral Water 750ml contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eS.Pellegrino is made from natural mineral water with CO2 added, and no allergens are listed on the bottle. Because labels can be updated between production runs, anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the bottle before drinking to confirm the current ingredient information.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many servings are in a 750ml S.Pellegrino bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe 25.3 fl oz glass bottle holds about two 12 fl oz servings, which makes it a good size to share across a meal. Each serving lists 0 calories, 0g sugar and 0g fat, with roughly 60mg of calcium. Check the label for the current nutrition facts.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve S.Pellegrino 750ml for the best sparkle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled and open the cap slowly, since the contents are under pressure. Pour gently into a glass to protect the fine bubbles. It works alongside a meal on its own, or as a sparkling mixer for cocktails and mocktails. Recycle the glass bottle when it is empty.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes does S.Pellegrino 750ml come in for restaurants or hosting?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe 750ml glass bottle is offered as a Single, a Pack of 3 and a Pack of 6. Singles work for a dinner at home, while the larger packs help restaurants, caterers and hosts keep several table-sized bottles on hand for a busy service or event.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does S.Pellegrino Sparkling Natural Mineral Water 750ml contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"S.Pellegrino is made from natural mineral water with CO2 added, and no allergens are listed on the bottle. Because labels can be updated between production runs, anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the bottle before drinking to confirm the current ingredient information.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How many servings are in a 750ml S.Pellegrino bottle?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 25.3 fl oz glass bottle holds about two 12 fl oz servings, which makes it a good size to share across a meal. Each serving lists 0 calories, 0g sugar and 0g fat, with roughly 60mg of calcium. Check the label for the current nutrition facts.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve S.Pellegrino 750ml for the best sparkle?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled and open the cap slowly, since the contents are under pressure. Pour gently into a glass to protect the fine bubbles. It works alongside a meal on its own, or as a sparkling mixer for cocktails and mocktails. Recycle the glass bottle when it is empty.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What pack sizes does S.Pellegrino 750ml come in for restaurants or hosting?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 750ml glass bottle is offered as a Single, a Pack of 3 and a Pack of 6. Singles work for a dinner at home, while the larger packs help restaurants, caterers and hosts keep several table-sized bottles on hand for a busy service or event.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"S.Pellegrino","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604401946838,"sku":"SPELLEGRINO-750ML-SINGLE","price":5.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604401979606,"sku":"SPELLEGRINO-750ML-PACK3","price":16.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604402012374,"sku":"SPELLEGRINO-750ML-PACK6","price":30.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/sp.jpg?v=1791993096"},{"product_id":"nescafe-tasters-choice-french-roast-instant-coffee-7oz","title":"Nescafe Taster's Choice French Roast Instant Coffee, 7 oz Jar","description":"\u003cp\u003eNescafe Taster's Choice French Roast is a 7 oz (198 g) glass jar of freeze-dried dark roast instant coffee that makes up to 105 cups. It dissolves in hot water in seconds, so no brewing gear is needed. You can order it as a Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 for home pantries and office kitchens. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat defines Taster's Choice French Roast\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e7 oz (198 g) jar, up to 105 cups per the label directions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFreeze-dried instant granules\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrench Roast dark roast character\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMade from coffee, with no fillers listed on the jar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eResealable glass jar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDissolves in hot water in seconds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Brew\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStir 1 rounded teaspoon into about 6 fl oz of hot water and adjust the amount for a stronger or milder cup. The granules also work as a base for iced coffee or in baking recipes that use instant coffee. Keep the jar sealed at room temperature.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nescafé\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eTaster's Choice is a jarred instant coffee line from Nescafé, the Nestlé coffee brand sold in many countries. It sits alongside the stick products and the French Roast is the darker roast in the jarred range, aimed at drinkers who want a bolder flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nescafe Taster's Choice French Roast contain common allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe jar is labeled as made from coffee, with no allergens listed on the packaging we have on file. Facility statements can change between production runs, so anyone with a food allergy should read the printed jar label to confirm the latest ingredient and allergen information before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I prepare Taster's Choice French Roast instant coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAdd 1 rounded teaspoon of the granules to about 6 fl oz of hot water and stir until fully dissolved. Use a slightly bigger spoonful for a stronger cup or less for a milder one. It also makes a base for iced coffee or baking.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many cups does one jar of Taster's Choice French Roast make?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEach 7 oz (198 g) jar makes up to 105 cups when prepared following the directions on the label. The real number depends on the amount of coffee you use per mug, so a stronger cup will use up the jar a little faster.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes of Taster's Choice French Roast can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can order a Single jar, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. A single jar suits a household trying the dark roast, and the multipacks help offices, churches and cafés that keep instant coffee available for guests.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Nescafe Taster's Choice French Roast contain common allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The jar is labeled as made from coffee, with no allergens listed on the packaging we have on file. Facility statements can change between production runs, so anyone with a food allergy should read the printed jar label to confirm the latest ingredient and allergen information before use.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I prepare Taster's Choice French Roast instant coffee?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Add 1 rounded teaspoon of the granules to about 6 fl oz of hot water and stir until fully dissolved. Use a slightly bigger spoonful for a stronger cup or less for a milder one. It also makes a base for iced coffee or baking.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How many cups does one jar of Taster's Choice French Roast make?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Each 7 oz (198 g) jar makes up to 105 cups when prepared following the directions on the label. The real number depends on the amount of coffee you use per mug, so a stronger cup will use up the jar a little faster.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What pack sizes of Taster's Choice French Roast can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can order a Single jar, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6. A single jar suits a household trying the dark roast, and the multipacks help offices, churches and cafés that keep instant coffee available for guests.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nescafé","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604402045142,"sku":"NESCAFE-TC-FRENCHROAST-7OZ-SINGLE","price":22.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604402077910,"sku":"NESCAFE-TC-FRENCHROAST-7OZ-PACK3","price":62.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604402110678,"sku":"NESCAFE-TC-FRENCHROAST-7OZ-PACK6","price":118.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/fc.jpg?v=1791993097"},{"product_id":"nescafe-clasico-dark-roast-instant-coffee-1-7-oz-50-g","title":"Nescafe Clasico Instant Coffee, Dark Roast, 1.7 oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eNescafé Clásico Dark Roast Instant Coffee in the 1.7 oz (50 g) jar is a small-format pure coffee that makes about 25 cups. It suits trying the roast or occasional drinking, and it also comes as a Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 when you want spares for a desk, a cabin or a guest room. Orders leave our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the small Nescafé Clásico jar earns its spot\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1.7 oz (50 g) jar, about 25 cups\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDark roast made from 100% pure coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInstant granules that dissolve in hot water\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePacked in a protective atmosphere before opening\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eResealable lid for use between cups\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAvailable as Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Brew\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStir 1 teaspoon of Nescafé Clásico into about 6 fl oz of hot water until dissolved, then use more or less for a bolder or milder cup. Close the lid tightly after every use and keep the jar in a cool, dry cupboard to help it stay fresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nescafé\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNescafé is Nestlé's instant coffee brand, and Clásico is its dark roast line. This 1.7 oz jar is the compact size, handy for sampling the flavor or for occasional cups between larger jars. According to the label, it is made from 100% pure coffee.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat ingredients are in Nescafé Clásico Dark Roast 1.7 oz?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe jar states that it is made from 100% pure coffee, and no other ingredients or formal allergen statement appear on the label we have on file. Anyone with dietary concerns should read the ingredient panel printed on the jar, since labeling can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I prepare a cup of Nescafé Clásico instant coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAdd one teaspoon of the granules to about 6 fl oz of hot water and stir until dissolved. A 1.7 oz jar is sized to give roughly 25 cups at that ratio, though you can use more or less coffee to reach the strength you like.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I keep Nescafé Clásico fresh after opening?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eClose the jar tightly after each use and store it in a cool, dry place, as the packaging suggests. The coffee is sealed in a protective atmosphere before opening, so putting the lid back on promptly helps preserve flavor and quality while you work through the jar.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich Nescafé Clásico 1.7 oz pack sizes can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThis listing offers a Single 1.7 oz jar, a Pack of 3 and a Pack of 6. One jar works for a trial or occasional use, while multipacks are useful for keeping jars at home, at work and in a travel bag, or for stocking an office pantry.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What ingredients are in Nescafé Clásico Dark Roast 1.7 oz?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The jar states that it is made from 100% pure coffee, and no other ingredients or formal allergen statement appear on the label we have on file. Anyone with dietary concerns should read the ingredient panel printed on the jar, since labeling can change between production runs.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I prepare a cup of Nescafé Clásico instant coffee?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Add one teaspoon of the granules to about 6 fl oz of hot water and stir until dissolved. A 1.7 oz jar is sized to give roughly 25 cups at that ratio, though you can use more or less coffee to reach the strength you like.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I keep Nescafé Clásico fresh after opening?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Close the jar tightly after each use and store it in a cool, dry place, as the packaging suggests. The coffee is sealed in a protective atmosphere before opening, so putting the lid back on promptly helps preserve flavor and quality while you work through the jar.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which Nescafé Clásico 1.7 oz pack sizes can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"This listing offers a Single 1.7 oz jar, a Pack of 3 and a Pack of 6. One jar works for a trial or occasional use, while multipacks are useful for keeping jars at home, at work and in a travel bag, or for stocking an office pantry.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nescafé","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604402274518,"sku":"NESCAFE-CLASICODARKROAST-SINGLE","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604402307286,"sku":"NESCAFE-CLASICODARKROAST-PACK3","price":21.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604402340054,"sku":"NESCAFE-CLASICODARKROAST-PACK6","price":41.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/nc.png?v=1791993098"},{"product_id":"swee-touch-nee-orange-pekoe-black-tea-100-bags-8-oz","title":"Swee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe Black Tea, 100 Bags, 8 oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eSwee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe Black Tea is an 8 oz box of 100 individually wrapped tea bags, made from an Orange Pekoe and Pekoe Cut blend with a full-bodied, classic black tea character. It carries an OU kosher certification. Choose a Single box, a 3-Pack or a 6-Pack, shipped from our US warehouse, for homes, offices and frequent tea drinkers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Swee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe Black Tea stays on the shelf\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOrange Pekoe and Pekoe Cut black tea blend\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e100 individually wrapped tea bags per 8 oz box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKosher certified by OU\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUnflavored, so milk, lemon or honey can be added to taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorks for a single hot cup or a pitcher of iced tea\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFamily-size box for households and offices\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Brew\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePour freshly boiled water over one bag and steep three to five minutes, then add milk, lemon or sweetener. For a pitcher of iced tea, use two bags per 8 oz of boiling water, steep five minutes, pour over ice and dilute to taste. Store the box in a cool, dry place.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Swee-Touch-Nee\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSwee-Touch-Nee is a long-running kosher black tea brand, known for its Orange Pekoe and Pekoe Cut blend and a steady, full-bodied cup. Today it is distributed by Kayco, a kosher food company, which suits households that look for certified kosher products.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Swee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe Black Tea contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe tea is made from black tea leaves with no other listed ingredients, and the box is OU kosher certified. Black tea is not a common allergen, but anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label before brewing, since packaging and sourcing notes can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Swee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe Black Tea for iced tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUse two tea bags for every 8 oz of boiling water, steep for about five minutes, then pour the concentrate over a pitcher of ice and add cold water to taste. For a hot cup, one bag in freshly boiled water for three to five minutes is the usual approach.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat kind of tea is Swee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOrange Pekoe and Pekoe Cut describe the leaf grade and cut of the black tea, not a flavor. There is no added flavoring, so the taste comes from the leaves themselves: a classic, full-bodied cup that accepts milk, lemon, honey or sugar without losing its backbone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Swee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe Black Tea are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe listing offers a Single 100-bag box, a 3-Pack and a 6-Pack. Multipacks suit offices, cafés and large families that go through tea quickly, and they cut down on reorders. Choose the Single box if you want to try the tea first.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Swee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe Black Tea contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The tea is made from black tea leaves with no other listed ingredients, and the box is OU kosher certified. Black tea is not a common allergen, but anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label before brewing, since packaging and sourcing notes can change between production runs.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I brew Swee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe Black Tea for iced tea?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Use two tea bags for every 8 oz of boiling water, steep for about five minutes, then pour the concentrate over a pitcher of ice and add cold water to taste. For a hot cup, one bag in freshly boiled water for three to five minutes is the usual approach.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What kind of tea is Swee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Orange Pekoe and Pekoe Cut describe the leaf grade and cut of the black tea, not a flavor. There is no added flavoring, so the taste comes from the leaves themselves: a classic, full-bodied cup that accepts milk, lemon, honey or sugar without losing its backbone.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Swee-Touch-Nee Orange Pekoe Black Tea are available?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The listing offers a Single 100-bag box, a 3-Pack and a 6-Pack. Multipacks suit offices, cafés and large families that go through tea quickly, and they cut down on reorders. Choose the Single box if you want to try the tea first.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Swee-Touch-Nee","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604402372822,"sku":"SWEETOUCHNEE-BLK100-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3-Pack","offer_id":67604402405590,"sku":"SWEETOUCHNEE-BLK100-PACK3","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6-Pack","offer_id":67604402438358,"sku":"SWEETOUCHNEE-BLK100-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/0007037303150.jpg?v=1791993099"},{"product_id":"virgils-orange-cream-soda-12-fl-oz-355ml-real-vanilla-beans-no-preservatives","title":"Virgil's Orange Cream Soda, Real Vanilla Beans, 12 fl oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eVirgil's Orange Cream Soda, 12 fl oz (355 mL), is a micro brewed craft soda made with real vanilla beans and all-natural orange cream flavors, sweetened with cane sugar and bottled in glass. It is labeled gluten-free and low sodium. Choose a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 from our US warehouse for parties, cafés and home fridges.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat stands out in Virgil's Orange Cream Soda\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMade with real vanilla beans and all-natural orange cream flavors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with real cane sugar, not high-fructose corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo preservatives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGluten-free and low sodium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicro brewed in small batches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) glass bottle in four pack options\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eServe well chilled from the glass bottle, or pour over ice with an orange slice. For a creamy treat, drop a scoop of vanilla ice cream into a glass and top it with the soda. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place and refrigerate after opening.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Virgil's\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eVirgil's makes premium micro brewed sodas with real cane sugar and natural ingredients, including real vanilla beans in this recipe. Orange Cream sits beside Root Beer, Black Cherry and Vanilla Cream in the lineup, and every flavor comes in the same classic glass bottle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Virgil's Orange Cream Soda different from other orange cream sodas?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is micro brewed with real vanilla beans and all-natural orange cream flavors instead of artificial vanilla or orange. Based on the current bottle label, it has no preservatives, is low sodium and gluten-free, and uses cane sugar rather than high-fructose corn syrup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Virgil's Orange Cream Soda gluten-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, the bottle is labeled gluten-free. It is also low sodium and made with all-natural flavors, with no artificial preservatives. Anyone with a specific dietary need or allergy should still read the printed label on the bottle to confirm the current ingredient details before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should Virgil's Orange Cream Soda be served?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled, either directly from the glass bottle or poured over ice with a slice of fresh orange. A scoop of vanilla ice cream turns it into a quick dessert float. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place and refrigerate any bottle once opened.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many bottles of Virgil's Orange Cream Soda can I order at once?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe listing offers a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 and a Pack of 12, all in the same 12 fl oz glass bottle. The larger packs work well for birthday parties, restaurant service and office fridges, while a single bottle lets you test the flavor first.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What makes Virgil's Orange Cream Soda different from other orange cream sodas?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is micro brewed with real vanilla beans and all-natural orange cream flavors instead of artificial vanilla or orange. Based on the current bottle label, it has no preservatives, is low sodium and gluten-free, and uses cane sugar rather than high-fructose corn syrup.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Virgil's Orange Cream Soda gluten-free?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes, the bottle is labeled gluten-free. It is also low sodium and made with all-natural flavors, with no artificial preservatives. Anyone with a specific dietary need or allergy should still read the printed label on the bottle to confirm the current ingredient details before drinking.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should Virgil's Orange Cream Soda be served?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled, either directly from the glass bottle or poured over ice with a slice of fresh orange. A scoop of vanilla ice cream turns it into a quick dessert float. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place and refrigerate any bottle once opened.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How many bottles of Virgil's Orange Cream Soda can I order at once?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The listing offers a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 and a Pack of 12, all in the same 12 fl oz glass bottle. The larger packs work well for birthday parties, restaurant service and office fridges, while a single bottle lets you test the flavor first.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Virgil's","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604402471126,"sku":"VIRGILS-ORANGE-CREAM-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604402503894,"sku":"VIRGILS-ORANGE-CREAM-12OZ-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604402536662,"sku":"VIRGILS-ORANGE-CREAM-12OZ-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604402569430,"sku":"VIRGILS-ORANGE-CREAM-12OZ-PACK12","price":24.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/Os1.webp?v=1791993099"},{"product_id":"virgils-vanilla-cream-soda-12-fl-oz-355ml-all-natural-cane-sugar","title":"Virgil's All-Natural Vanilla Cream Cane Sugar Soda, 12 fl oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eVirgil's Vanilla Cream Soda, 12 fl oz (355 mL), is an all-natural craft soda made with cane sugar and natural flavors, caffeine-free and Non-GMO Project Verified, with 160 calories per glass bottle. You can order a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 from our US warehouse for family gatherings, cafés and shared fridges.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat to know about Virgil's Vanilla Cream Soda\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSmooth vanilla cream flavor from natural flavors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with real cane sugar, no artificial sweeteners\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-GMO Project Verified, with the seal on the label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e160 calories per 12 fl oz bottle, per the current label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGlass bottle in Single, 3, 6 and 12 pack options\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottle well and drink it straight from the glass or poured over ice. Add a scoop of vanilla ice cream for a classic float. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place, and refrigerate any bottle once it has been opened.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Virgil's\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eVirgil's makes premium sodas from real cane sugar and all-natural flavors. Vanilla Cream joins Root Beer, Black Cherry and Orange Cream in the lineup, and it is one of the brand's Non-GMO Project Verified offerings, sold in the same classic glass bottle as the rest of the range.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Virgil's Vanilla Cream Soda contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe label lists sparkling filtered water, cane sugar, natural caramel color, natural flavors and malic acid, with no artificial sweeteners or preservatives, and no major allergen statement appears on the label we reviewed. Ingredients may change between batches, so anyone with a food allergy should read the printed bottle label.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should Virgil's Vanilla Cream Soda be served?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled, straight from the glass bottle or over ice for a lighter pour. Combine it with vanilla ice cream for a creamy float. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place, and refrigerate any bottle once it has been opened.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Virgil's Vanilla Cream Soda Non-GMO?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It is Non-GMO Project Verified and carries the Non-GMO Project seal on its label, along with real cane sugar and all-natural flavors. The soda is also caffeine-free. For the latest certification details, check the printed label on the bottle you receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes of Virgil's Vanilla Cream Soda are offered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe listing offers a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 and a Pack of 12, all in the 12 fl oz glass bottle. Bigger packs make sense for parties, cafés and office pantries, and a single bottle is an easy way to try the flavor before committing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Virgil's Vanilla Cream Soda contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The label lists sparkling filtered water, cane sugar, natural caramel color, natural flavors and malic acid, with no artificial sweeteners or preservatives, and no major allergen statement appears on the label we reviewed. Ingredients may change between batches, so anyone with a food allergy should read the printed bottle label.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should Virgil's Vanilla Cream Soda be served?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Serve it well chilled, straight from the glass bottle or over ice for a lighter pour. Combine it with vanilla ice cream for a creamy float. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place, and refrigerate any bottle once it has been opened.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Virgil's Vanilla Cream Soda Non-GMO?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. It is Non-GMO Project Verified and carries the Non-GMO Project seal on its label, along with real cane sugar and all-natural flavors. The soda is also caffeine-free. For the latest certification details, check the printed label on the bottle you receive.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What pack sizes of Virgil's Vanilla Cream Soda are offered?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The listing offers a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 and a Pack of 12, all in the 12 fl oz glass bottle. Bigger packs make sense for parties, cafés and office pantries, and a single bottle is an easy way to try the flavor before committing.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Virgil's","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604402602198,"sku":"VIRGILS-VANILLA-CREAM-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604402634966,"sku":"VIRGILS-VANILLA-CREAM-12OZ-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604402667734,"sku":"VIRGILS-VANILLA-CREAM-12OZ-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604402700502,"sku":"VIRGILS-VANILLA-CREAM-12OZ-PACK12","price":24.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/CS1.jpg?v=1791993100"},{"product_id":"virgils-black-cherry-soda-12-fl-oz-355ml-cane-sugar-soda","title":"Virgil's Black Cherry Cane Sugar Soda, 12 fl oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eVirgil's Black Cherry Soda, 12 fl oz (355 mL), is a craft soda sweetened with cane sugar and flavored with natural black cherry, bottled caffeine-free in glass. Order it as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 from our US warehouse; the larger packs suit parties, restaurant fridges, office pantries and anyone who keeps a few cold bottles ready at home.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Virgil's Black Cherry Soda\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBold natural black cherry flavor, fruit-forward and bright\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with real cane sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeine-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e170 calories and 42 g total sugar per bottle, per the current label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSold as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottle well and drink it straight from the glass, over ice, or in a black cherry float or mocktail. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, and put the bottle in the refrigerator once it has been opened.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Virgil's\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eVirgil's is a craft soda brand built on real cane sugar and distinctive, bold flavors. Its lineup includes Root Beer, Black Cherry, Vanilla Cream and Orange Cream, all sold in classic glass bottles. The Black Cherry version leans on a bright cherry profile instead of the creamy notes found elsewhere in the range.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Virgil's Black Cherry Soda contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe label lists sparkling filtered water, cane sugar, natural black cherry flavor, juice for color, malic acid and natural mushroom extract, and no major allergen statement appears on the label we reviewed. Ingredients can change between batches, so anyone with a food allergy should read the printed bottle label first.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should Virgil's Black Cherry Soda be stored and served?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStore unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight, then chill them thoroughly before opening. Serve from the bottle, pour over ice, or use it as the base for a cherry float. Refrigerate an opened bottle and finish it within a few days for the best fizz and flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Virgil's Black Cherry Soda taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBlack Cherry is bright and fruit-forward, with a clear natural cherry taste and a rounded, less syrupy cane sugar sweetness. It leans on cherry rather than the cream-forward notes found elsewhere in the Virgil's range, and it is caffeine-free, so it works for sipping through the day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Virgil's Black Cherry Soda are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can order a Single bottle to try, or a Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 for stocking up. The 12-bottle pack is a good fit for parties, restaurant coolers and office fridges, while smaller packs suit households that want a few bottles on hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Virgil's Black Cherry Soda contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The label lists sparkling filtered water, cane sugar, natural black cherry flavor, juice for color, malic acid and natural mushroom extract, and no major allergen statement appears on the label we reviewed. Ingredients can change between batches, so anyone with a food allergy should read the printed bottle label first.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should Virgil's Black Cherry Soda be stored and served?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry spot away from sunlight, then chill them thoroughly before opening. Serve from the bottle, pour over ice, or use it as the base for a cherry float. Refrigerate an opened bottle and finish it within a few days for the best fizz and flavor.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Virgil's Black Cherry Soda taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Black Cherry is bright and fruit-forward, with a clear natural cherry taste and a rounded, less syrupy cane sugar sweetness. It leans on cherry rather than the cream-forward notes found elsewhere in the Virgil's range, and it is caffeine-free, so it works for sipping through the day.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Virgil's Black Cherry Soda are available?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can order a Single bottle to try, or a Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 for stocking up. The 12-bottle pack is a good fit for parties, restaurant coolers and office fridges, while smaller packs suit households that want a few bottles on hand.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Virgil's","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604402733270,"sku":"VIRGILS-BLACKCHERRY-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604402766038,"sku":"VIRGILS-BLACKCHERRY-12OZ-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604402798806,"sku":"VIRGILS-BLACKCHERRY-12OZ-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604402831574,"sku":"VIRGILS-BLACKCHERRY-12OZ-PACK12","price":24.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/virgils-black-cherry-soda-12-fl-oz-main.png?v=1791993101"},{"product_id":"virgils-root-beer-12-fl-oz-355ml-cane-sugar-soda","title":"Virgil's Root Beer Cane Sugar Soda, 12 fl oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eVirgil's Root Beer, 12 fl oz (355 mL), is a craft soda sweetened with cane sugar, with a bold root-and-spice profile and a smooth, creamy finish, brewed caffeine-free and bottled in glass. It comes as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 from our US warehouse, which suits cookouts, diners, office fridges and family pantries.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Virgil's Root Beer is a pantry regular\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRoot beer flavor with natural root beer and cream flavors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSweetened with real cane sugar rather than corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeine-free recipe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e170 calories and 42 g total sugar per bottle, per the current label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSingle, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 and Pack of 12 options\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottle thoroughly and drink it from the bottle or over ice. For a classic root beer float, pour it over a scoop of vanilla ice cream in a tall glass. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place away from direct light, and refrigerate once opened.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Virgil's\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eVirgil's is a craft soda brand known for real cane sugar and bold flavors, with a lineup that covers Root Beer, Black Cherry, Vanilla Cream and Orange Cream. Its Root Beer emphasizes a rounded blend of root and spice notes finished with a smooth, creamy note, bottled in the same glass format as its other flavors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Virgil's Root Beer contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe label lists sparkling filtered water, cane sugar, natural root beer flavor, natural cream flavor, caramel color, citric acid and natural mushroom extract, with no major allergen statement on the label we reviewed. Because ingredients can change between batches, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed label before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should Virgil's Root Beer be stored and served?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStore unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, then chill them well before opening. Serve it from the bottle, over ice, or with vanilla ice cream for a float. After opening, refrigerate the bottle and finish it within a few days.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Virgil's Root Beer taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eRoot Beer is built on a bold root-and-spice flavor with natural cream flavor for a smooth, creamy finish. It is sweetened with cane sugar rather than corn syrup for a rounder, less syrupy sweetness, and the recipe is caffeine-free, so it suits all-day sipping or a vanilla ice cream float.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Virgil's Root Beer can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe listing includes a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 and a Pack of 12. Larger packs help when you are stocking a restaurant cooler, planning a cookout or keeping an office fridge full, and the single bottle works as a low-commitment trial.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Virgil's Root Beer contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The label lists sparkling filtered water, cane sugar, natural root beer flavor, natural cream flavor, caramel color, citric acid and natural mushroom extract, with no major allergen statement on the label we reviewed. Because ingredients can change between batches, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed label before drinking.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should Virgil's Root Beer be stored and served?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, then chill them well before opening. Serve it from the bottle, over ice, or with vanilla ice cream for a float. After opening, refrigerate the bottle and finish it within a few days.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does Virgil's Root Beer taste like?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Root Beer is built on a bold root-and-spice flavor with natural cream flavor for a smooth, creamy finish. It is sweetened with cane sugar rather than corn syrup for a rounder, less syrupy sweetness, and the recipe is caffeine-free, so it suits all-day sipping or a vanilla ice cream float.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Virgil's Root Beer can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The listing includes a Single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 and a Pack of 12. Larger packs help when you are stocking a restaurant cooler, planning a cookout or keeping an office fridge full, and the single bottle works as a low-commitment trial.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Virgil's","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604402864342,"sku":"VIRGILS-ROOTBEER-12OZ-SINGLE","price":2.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604402897110,"sku":"VIRGILS-ROOTBEER-12OZ-PACK3","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604402929878,"sku":"VIRGILS-ROOTBEER-12OZ-PACK6","price":12.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604402962646,"sku":"VIRGILS-ROOTBEER-12OZ-PACK12","price":24.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/virgils-root-beer-12-fl-oz-main.png?v=1791993102"},{"product_id":"liquid-i-v-hydration-multiplier-30-sticks-3-flavors","title":"Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier, 3 Flavors, 30 Sticks","description":"\u003cp\u003eLiquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier is a 30-stick bag of powdered electrolyte drink mix, with every stick portioned for one bottle of water. Three flavors are offered: Lemon Lime and Strawberry Variety, Sugar-Free White Peach and Raspberry Lemonade, and Sugar-Free Ring Pop Cherry. It ships from our US warehouse, and the sticks suit gym bags, desk drawers, travel kits and shared office pantries.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLiquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier at a glance\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFormat: 30 individually portioned single-serve sticks in each bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLemon Lime \u0026amp; Strawberry Variety holds 15 sticks of each flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSugar-Free White Peach \u0026amp; Raspberry Lemonade holds 15 sticks of each flavor and is labeled sugar-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSugar-Free Ring Pop Cherry holds 30 cherry sticks and is labeled sugar-free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContains electrolytes plus B vitamins and vitamin C, per the Supplement Facts panel on the box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabel claims: gluten-free, dairy-free, soy-free, vegan and Non-GMO\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Mix\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEmpty one stick into about 16 fl oz (473 mL) of cold water, then stir or shake until the powder dissolves. Add a little more or less water to suit your taste. Keep unopened sticks in a cool, dry spot, and follow the directions and Supplement Facts panel printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Liquid I.V.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eLiquid I.V. is a hydration brand based in Los Angeles that was founded in 2012. It makes powdered drink mixes built around electrolytes and vitamins, packed in individual sticks so they travel easily. The Hydration Multiplier line comes in several flavors, including sugar-free options, which lets households and workplaces keep a mix of tastes on hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier 30 Sticks gluten-free and vegan?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe label claims gluten-free, dairy-free, soy-free, vegan and Non-GMO. Recipes and facility notes can change, and the Supplement Facts panel lists the full contents, so read the printed label on your box before serving it to anyone with allergies or strict dietary needs. This answer reflects the label claims only.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I prepare Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier sticks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePour one stick into roughly 16 fluid ounces of cold water and stir or shake until it is fully dissolved. You can use a little more or less water to match your taste. Store unopened sticks sealed in a cool, dry place and follow the directions printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat flavors does Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier 30 Sticks come in?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThere are three options. Lemon Lime and Strawberry Variety mixes 15 sticks of each flavor, Sugar-Free White Peach and Raspberry Lemonade also mixes 15 of each, and Sugar-Free Ring Pop Cherry has 30 cherry sticks. Two of the three are labeled sugar-free, so pick by taste and by what the label says.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier easy to stock for an office or team?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEach flavor is sold as a single 30-stick bag, so you choose by flavor rather than by pack size. The sticks are individually portioned and compact, which makes them easy to hand out at an office, keep in a gym locker or pack for a trip. Order several bags if you want more than one flavor in rotation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier 30 Sticks gluten-free and vegan?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The label claims gluten-free, dairy-free, soy-free, vegan and Non-GMO. Recipes and facility notes can change, and the Supplement Facts panel lists the full contents, so read the printed label on your box before serving it to anyone with allergies or strict dietary needs. This answer reflects the label claims only.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I prepare Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier sticks?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Pour one stick into roughly 16 fluid ounces of cold water and stir or shake until it is fully dissolved. You can use a little more or less water to match your taste. Store unopened sticks sealed in a cool, dry place and follow the directions printed on the box.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What flavors does Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier 30 Sticks come in?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"There are three options. Lemon Lime and Strawberry Variety mixes 15 sticks of each flavor, Sugar-Free White Peach and Raspberry Lemonade also mixes 15 of each, and Sugar-Free Ring Pop Cherry has 30 cherry sticks. Two of the three are labeled sugar-free, so pick by taste and by what the label says.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Liquid I.V. Hydration Multiplier easy to stock for an office or team?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Each flavor is sold as a single 30-stick bag, so you choose by flavor rather than by pack size. The sticks are individually portioned and compact, which makes them easy to hand out at an office, keep in a gym locker or pack for a trip. Order several bags if you want more than one flavor in rotation.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Liquid I.V.","offers":[{"title":"Lemon Lime \u0026 Strawberry Variety","offer_id":67604402995414,"sku":"LIQUIDIV-HYDRATION-30CT-LEMONLIME-STRAWBERRY","price":56.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Sugar-Free White Peach \u0026 Raspberry Lemonade","offer_id":67604403028182,"sku":"LIQUIDIV-HYDRATION-30CT-SF-PEACH-RASPLEMON","price":56.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Sugar-Free Ring Pop Cherry","offer_id":67604403060950,"sku":"LIQUIDIV-HYDRATION-30CT-SF-RINGPOP-CHERRY","price":56.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/liquid-iv-lemon-lime-strawberry-30-stick-front.png?v=1791993103"},{"product_id":"celestial-seasonings-herbal-tea-1-1-7-oz-29-48g-8-varieties","title":"Celestial Seasonings Herbal Tea, 8 Varieties, 1 to 1.7 oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eCelestial Seasonings Herbal Tea is a range of eight caffeine-free varieties in boxes of 18 to 20 tea bags, each box weighing 1 to 1.7 oz. Choose from Tension Tamer, Sleepytime Honey, Peppermint, Madagascar Vanilla, Lemon Zinger, Cinnamon Apple Spice and two sampler boxes. A Single, Pack of 3 or Pack of 6 suits a home pantry, an office tea shelf or a café. Ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Celestial Seasonings Herbal Tea\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEight varieties: Tension Tamer, Sleepytime Honey, Peppermint, Madagascar Vanilla, Lemon Zinger, Herbal Tea Sampler, Fruit Tea Sampler and Cinnamon Apple Spice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvery variety listed is labeled caffeine free\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e20 tea bags in most single-flavor boxes, 18 in the sampler boxes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHerbal Tea Sampler and Fruit Tea Sampler combine several blends in one box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIndividually wrapped tea bags\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSingle, Pack of 3 and Pack of 6 complete boxes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Brew\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePour freshly boiled water over one tea bag and steep for 4 to 6 minutes, then lift the bag out. Sweeten if you like, and follow the directions printed on the box, since strength varies by blend. For iced tea, steep as usual and pour over ice. Store boxes in a cool, dry place away from strong odors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Celestial Seasonings\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCelestial Seasonings began in 1969 in Boulder, Colorado, and became known for naturally caffeine-free herbal tea blends. The brand is sold across the country and recognized for colorful, memorable blend names such as Sleepytime and Lemon Zinger. This listing gathers eight of those blends in one place so a household or workplace can pick a favorite or mix several.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAre Celestial Seasonings Herbal Teas caffeine free and allergen friendly?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEvery variety on this listing is labeled caffeine free. Ingredients differ from blend to blend, and herbal teas can include flavorings, spices or other botanicals, so anyone with allergies or sensitivities should read the printed ingredient panel on the specific box before drinking. The label is the final word on each flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Celestial Seasonings Herbal Tea hot or iced?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUse freshly boiled filtered water, pour it over a single bag and steep for four to six minutes. Sweeten to taste if wanted. For iced tea, brew the same way and pour over ice, or refrigerate it first. Each box prints its own directions, which are worth following since blend strength differs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich Celestial Seasonings Herbal Tea flavor should I choose?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe names give clues: Peppermint and Lemon Zinger point to bright, fresh flavors, while Madagascar Vanilla and Sleepytime Honey sound softer and sweeter. The Herbal Tea Sampler and Fruit Tea Sampler boxes bundle several blends in one box, which helps when guests or coworkers have different tastes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes of Celestial Seasonings Herbal Tea are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEach flavor comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6 complete boxes. Most single-flavor boxes hold 20 tea bags and the sampler boxes hold 18, so a Pack of 6 gives an office or café a long supply without frequent reordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Are Celestial Seasonings Herbal Teas caffeine free and allergen friendly?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Every variety on this listing is labeled caffeine free. Ingredients differ from blend to blend, and herbal teas can include flavorings, spices or other botanicals, so anyone with allergies or sensitivities should read the printed ingredient panel on the specific box before drinking. The label is the final word on each flavor.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I brew Celestial Seasonings Herbal Tea hot or iced?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Use freshly boiled filtered water, pour it over a single bag and steep for four to six minutes. Sweeten to taste if wanted. For iced tea, brew the same way and pour over ice, or refrigerate it first. Each box prints its own directions, which are worth following since blend strength differs.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which Celestial Seasonings Herbal Tea flavor should I choose?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The names give clues: Peppermint and Lemon Zinger point to bright, fresh flavors, while Madagascar Vanilla and Sleepytime Honey sound softer and sweeter. The Herbal Tea Sampler and Fruit Tea Sampler boxes bundle several blends in one box, which helps when guests or coworkers have different tastes.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What pack sizes of Celestial Seasonings Herbal Tea are available?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Each flavor comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6 complete boxes. Most single-flavor boxes hold 20 tea bags and the sampler boxes hold 18, so a Pack of 6 gives an office or café a long supply without frequent reordering.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Celestial Seasonings","offers":[{"title":"Tension Tamer \/ Single","offer_id":67604403093718,"sku":"CELESTIAL-TENSION-TAMER-1.5OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Tension Tamer \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604403126486,"sku":"CELESTIAL-TENSION-TAMER-1.5OZ-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Tension Tamer \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604403159254,"sku":"CELESTIAL-TENSION-TAMER-1.5OZ-PACK6","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Sleepytime Honey \/ Single","offer_id":67604403192022,"sku":"CELESTIAL-SLEEPYTIME-HONEY-1OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Sleepytime Honey \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604403224790,"sku":"CELESTIAL-SLEEPYTIME-HONEY-1OZ-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Sleepytime Honey \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604403257558,"sku":"CELESTIAL-SLEEPYTIME-HONEY-1OZ-PACK6","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Peppermint \/ Single","offer_id":67604403290326,"sku":"CELESTIAL-PEPPERMINT-1.1OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Peppermint \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604403323094,"sku":"CELESTIAL-PEPPERMINT-1.1OZ-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Peppermint \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604403355862,"sku":"CELESTIAL-PEPPERMINT-1.1OZ-PACK6","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Madagascar Vanilla \/ Single","offer_id":67604403388630,"sku":"CELESTIAL-MADAGASCAR-VANILLA-1.5OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Madagascar Vanilla \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604403421398,"sku":"CELESTIAL-MADAGASCAR-VANILLA-1.5OZ-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Madagascar Vanilla \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604403454166,"sku":"CELESTIAL-MADAGASCAR-VANILLA-1.5OZ-PACK6","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Lemon Zinger \/ Single","offer_id":67604403486934,"sku":"CELESTIAL-LEMON-ZINGER-1.7OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Lemon Zinger \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604403519702,"sku":"CELESTIAL-LEMON-ZINGER-1.7OZ-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Lemon Zinger \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604403552470,"sku":"CELESTIAL-LEMON-ZINGER-1.7OZ-PACK6","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Herbal Tea Sampler \/ Single","offer_id":67604403585238,"sku":"CELESTIAL-HERBAL-SAMPLER-1.1OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Herbal Tea Sampler \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604403618006,"sku":"CELESTIAL-HERBAL-SAMPLER-1.1OZ-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Herbal Tea Sampler \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604403650774,"sku":"CELESTIAL-HERBAL-SAMPLER-1.1OZ-PACK6","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Fruit Tea Sampler \/ Single","offer_id":67604403683542,"sku":"CELESTIAL-FRUIT-SAMPLER-1.4OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Fruit Tea Sampler \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604403716310,"sku":"CELESTIAL-FRUIT-SAMPLER-1.4OZ-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Fruit Tea Sampler \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604403749078,"sku":"CELESTIAL-FRUIT-SAMPLER-1.4OZ-PACK6","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Cinnamon Apple Spice \/ Single","offer_id":67604403781846,"sku":"CELESTIAL-CINNAMON-APPLE-SPICE-1.7OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Cinnamon Apple Spice \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604403814614,"sku":"CELESTIAL-CINNAMON-APPLE-SPICE-1.7OZ-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Cinnamon Apple Spice \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604403847382,"sku":"CELESTIAL-CINNAMON-APPLE-SPICE-1.7OZ-PACK6","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/celestial-seasonings-tension-tamer-herbal-tea-20-count.png?v=1791993104"},{"product_id":"monster-energy-12-fl-oz-355-ml-original-ultra-flavors","title":"Monster Energy Drink, Original and Ultra Flavors, 12 fl oz Can","description":"\u003cp\u003eMonster Energy in 12 fl oz (355 mL) cans covers the full-sugar Original Green, four zero-sugar Ultra styles and a Random Variety pick. Every flavor comes as a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12, so one can for a lunch break or a stack for the office cooler both work. Orders leave our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat to know before stocking Monster Energy cans\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix choices: Original Green, Zero Ultra, Ultra Wild Passion, Ultra Blue Hawaiian, Ultra Sunrise and Random Variety\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOriginal Green is the classic full-sugar recipe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe four Ultra flavors are the zero-sugar options\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStandard 12 fl oz (355 mL) can\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContains caffeine and B vitamins as listed on the can label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRandom Variety is picked from the lineup based on current inventory\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eServe Monster Energy cold, straight from the can or over ice, and follow the directions and cautions printed on the label. Because it contains caffeine, think about your total intake across the day. Keep unopened cans in a cool, dry spot away from direct sun, heat and freezing temperatures.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Monster Energy\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMonster Energy is made by Monster Beverage Corporation of Corona, California, and the brand first appeared in 2002. It has become one of the most widely sold energy drink lines around, and the Original and Ultra families included here are among its best-known cans.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat flavors of Monster Energy are included in this 12 fl oz listing?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can choose Original Green, Zero Ultra, Ultra Wild Passion, Ultra Blue Hawaiian, Ultra Sunrise or Random Variety. Random Variety is filled from the listed flavors depending on what is in stock, so no exact mix is promised and duplicate cans can appear. Pick a named flavor if you want certainty.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAre all Monster Energy flavors in this listing sugar free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Original Green follows the classic full-sugar recipe, while Zero Ultra, Ultra Wild Passion, Ultra Blue Hawaiian and Ultra Sunrise are the zero-sugar styles. A Random Variety order could include Original Green, so read the printed nutrition panel on each can you receive for exact figures.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Monster Energy suitable for kids or people sensitive to caffeine?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMonster Energy contains caffeine, and the label advises against it for children, pregnant or nursing individuals and anyone sensitive to caffeine. If you are unsure, read the caution statements on the can and consider how much caffeine you already get from coffee, tea or soda during the day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of Monster Energy 12 fl oz cans can I order?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEach flavor is offered as a Single can, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. Smaller packs suit trying a new flavor, while the Pack of 12 makes sense for shared fridges, game nights and small shops that restock energy drinks regularly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What flavors of Monster Energy are included in this 12 fl oz listing?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can choose Original Green, Zero Ultra, Ultra Wild Passion, Ultra Blue Hawaiian, Ultra Sunrise or Random Variety. Random Variety is filled from the listed flavors depending on what is in stock, so no exact mix is promised and duplicate cans can appear. Pick a named flavor if you want certainty.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Are all Monster Energy flavors in this listing sugar free?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"No. Original Green follows the classic full-sugar recipe, while Zero Ultra, Ultra Wild Passion, Ultra Blue Hawaiian and Ultra Sunrise are the zero-sugar styles. A Random Variety order could include Original Green, so read the printed nutrition panel on each can you receive for exact figures.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Monster Energy suitable for kids or people sensitive to caffeine?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Monster Energy contains caffeine, and the label advises against it for children, pregnant or nursing individuals and anyone sensitive to caffeine. If you are unsure, read the caution statements on the can and consider how much caffeine you already get from coffee, tea or soda during the day.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of Monster Energy 12 fl oz cans can I order?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Each flavor is offered as a Single can, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. Smaller packs suit trying a new flavor, while the Pack of 12 makes sense for shared fridges, game nights and small shops that restock energy drinks regularly.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Monster Energy","offers":[{"title":"Original Green \/ Single","offer_id":67604403880150,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ORIGINAL-GREEN-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Original Green \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604403912918,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ORIGINAL-GREEN-PACK3","price":11.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Original Green \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604403945686,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ORIGINAL-GREEN-PACK6","price":23.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Original Green \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604403978454,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ORIGINAL-GREEN-PACK12","price":43.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Zero Ultra \/ Single","offer_id":67604404011222,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ZERO-ULTRA-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Zero Ultra \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604404043990,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ZERO-ULTRA-PACK3","price":11.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Zero Ultra \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604404076758,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ZERO-ULTRA-PACK6","price":23.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Zero Ultra \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604404109526,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ZERO-ULTRA-PACK12","price":43.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Wild Passion \/ Single","offer_id":67604404142294,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-WILD-PASSION-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Wild Passion \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604404175062,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-WILD-PASSION-PACK3","price":11.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Wild Passion \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604404207830,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-WILD-PASSION-PACK6","price":23.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Wild Passion \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604404240598,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-WILD-PASSION-PACK12","price":43.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Blue Hawaiian \/ Single","offer_id":67604404273366,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-BLUE-HAWAIIAN-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Blue Hawaiian \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604404306134,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-BLUE-HAWAIIAN-PACK3","price":11.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Blue Hawaiian \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604404338902,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-BLUE-HAWAIIAN-PACK6","price":23.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Blue Hawaiian \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604404371670,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-BLUE-HAWAIIAN-PACK12","price":43.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Sunrise \/ Single","offer_id":67604404404438,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-SUNRISE-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Sunrise \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604404437206,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-SUNRISE-PACK3","price":11.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Sunrise \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604404469974,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-SUNRISE-PACK6","price":23.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Ultra Sunrise \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604404502742,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-ULTRA-SUNRISE-PACK12","price":43.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Random Variety \/ Single","offer_id":67604404535510,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-RANDOM-VARIETY-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Random Variety \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604404568278,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-RANDOM-VARIETY-PACK3","price":11.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Random Variety \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604404601046,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-RANDOM-VARIETY-PACK6","price":23.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Random Variety \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604404633814,"sku":"MONSTER-ENERGY-12OZ-RANDOM-VARIETY-PACK12","price":43.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/monster-energy-original-green-12oz.png?v=1791993105"},{"product_id":"bigelow-tea-bags-assorted-varieties-20-count","title":"Bigelow Assorted Varieties Tea Bags, 20 Count","description":"\u003cp\u003eBigelow Tea Bags come in a 20-count box, and you choose the variety: Green Tea with Lemon, Peppermint, Oolong Classic, I Love Lemon, Orange \u0026amp; Spice, Cinnamon Stick Black Tea, Mint Medley or Perfect Peach. It ships from our US warehouse as one box, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6, ideal for offices, cafés and home pantries.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Bigelow Tea Bags in the 20-count box\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEight varieties to select from\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e20 tea bags per box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEach bag individually wrapped in a foil pouch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeine-free herbal choices: Peppermint, I Love Lemon, Orange \u0026amp; Spice, Mint Medley and Perfect Peach\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeinated choices: Green Tea with Lemon, Oolong Classic and Cinnamon Stick Black Tea\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorks for hot cups or brewed stronger for iced tea\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Brew\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePut one bag in a mug, add freshly boiled water and steep for three to five minutes, adjusting to taste. For iced tea, brew a little stronger and pour over ice. Keep the bag in its foil pouch until use, and store boxes somewhere cool and dry, away from strong odors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Bigelow\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBigelow is a family tea company known for individually wrapped tea bags and a wide selection of classic and herbal blends. Its foil pouch format is designed to protect flavor until the bag is used. Each box holds one chosen variety, which keeps things simple for break rooms and home pantries.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich Bigelow tea varieties can I choose in the 20-count box?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can choose Green Tea with Lemon, Peppermint Herbal, Oolong Classic, I Love Lemon Herbal, Orange \u0026amp; Spice Herbal, Cinnamon Stick Black Tea, Mint Medley Herbal or Perfect Peach Herbal. Each order is a box of one chosen variety, with 20 bags inside.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAre Bigelow tea bags caffeine-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt depends on the variety. Peppermint, I Love Lemon, Orange \u0026amp; Spice, Mint Medley and Perfect Peach are herbal choices described as caffeine-free, while Green Tea with Lemon, Oolong Classic and Cinnamon Stick Black Tea contain tea and naturally contain caffeine. Read the printed box for current details.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Bigelow tea bags for hot or iced tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePour freshly boiled water over one bag and steep for three to five minutes. For iced tea, brew it slightly stronger and pour over ice so it does not taste thin. Remove the bag when finished, and store unused bags in their foil pouches in a dry cupboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I order Bigelow 20-count boxes in multipacks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Choose a single box, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6 boxes of your selected variety. The larger packs suit offices and cafés that serve tea regularly. If you want several flavors, pick a different variety on each order.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which Bigelow tea varieties can I choose in the 20-count box?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can choose Green Tea with Lemon, Peppermint Herbal, Oolong Classic, I Love Lemon Herbal, Orange \u0026 Spice Herbal, Cinnamon Stick Black Tea, Mint Medley Herbal or Perfect Peach Herbal. Each order is a box of one chosen variety, with 20 bags inside.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Are Bigelow tea bags caffeine-free?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It depends on the variety. Peppermint, I Love Lemon, Orange \u0026 Spice, Mint Medley and Perfect Peach are herbal choices described as caffeine-free, while Green Tea with Lemon, Oolong Classic and Cinnamon Stick Black Tea contain tea and naturally contain caffeine. Read the printed box for current details.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I brew Bigelow tea bags for hot or iced tea?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Pour freshly boiled water over one bag and steep for three to five minutes. For iced tea, brew it slightly stronger and pour over ice so it does not taste thin. Remove the bag when finished, and store unused bags in their foil pouches in a dry cupboard.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I order Bigelow 20-count boxes in multipacks?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. Choose a single box, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6 boxes of your selected variety. The larger packs suit offices and cafés that serve tea regularly. If you want several flavors, pick a different variety on each order.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Bigelow","offers":[{"title":"Green Tea with Lemon \/ Single","offer_id":67604404666582,"sku":"BIG-20-GTL-1","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Tea with Lemon \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604404699350,"sku":"BIG-20-GTL-3","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Tea with Lemon \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604404732118,"sku":"BIG-20-GTL-6","price":28.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Peppermint Herbal Tea \/ Single","offer_id":67604404764886,"sku":"BIG-20-PMT-1","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Peppermint Herbal Tea \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604404797654,"sku":"BIG-20-PMT-3","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Peppermint Herbal Tea \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604404830422,"sku":"BIG-20-PMT-6","price":28.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Oolong Tea Classic \/ Single","offer_id":67604404863190,"sku":"BIG-20-OOL-1","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Oolong Tea Classic \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604404895958,"sku":"BIG-20-OOL-3","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Oolong Tea Classic \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604404928726,"sku":"BIG-20-OOL-6","price":28.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"I Love Lemon Herbal Tea \/ Single","offer_id":67604404961494,"sku":"BIG-20-ILL-1","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"I Love Lemon Herbal Tea \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604404994262,"sku":"BIG-20-ILL-3","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"I Love Lemon Herbal Tea \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604405027030,"sku":"BIG-20-ILL-6","price":28.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Orange \u0026 Spice Herbal Tea \/ Single","offer_id":67604405059798,"sku":"BIG-20-OAS-1","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Orange \u0026 Spice Herbal Tea \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604405092566,"sku":"BIG-20-OAS-3","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Orange \u0026 Spice Herbal Tea \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604405125334,"sku":"BIG-20-OAS-6","price":28.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Cinnamon Stick Black Tea \/ Single","offer_id":67604405158102,"sku":"BIG-20-CSB-1","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Cinnamon Stick Black Tea \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604405190870,"sku":"BIG-20-CSB-3","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Cinnamon Stick Black Tea \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604405223638,"sku":"BIG-20-CSB-6","price":28.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Mint Medley Herbal Tea \/ Single","offer_id":67604405256406,"sku":"BIG-20-MMH-1","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Mint Medley Herbal Tea \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604405289174,"sku":"BIG-20-MMH-3","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Mint Medley Herbal Tea \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604405321942,"sku":"BIG-20-MMH-6","price":28.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Perfect Peach Herbal Tea \/ Single","offer_id":67604405354710,"sku":"BIG-20-PPH-1","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Perfect Peach Herbal Tea \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604405387478,"sku":"BIG-20-PPH-3","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Perfect Peach Herbal Tea \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604405420246,"sku":"BIG-20-PPH-6","price":28.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/bigelow-green-tea-with-lemon-20-count.png?v=1791993107"},{"product_id":"celsius-energy-drink-flavor-variety-packs-12-oz","title":"CELSIUS Energy Drink, 12 fl oz, Flavors \u0026 Random Variety Packs","description":"\u003cp\u003eCELSIUS Energy Drink 12 fl oz is a sparkling, zero-sugar energy drink with 200 mg of caffeine per can. Seven flavors are offered, Peach Vibe, Electric Vibe, Tropical Vibe, Orange, Cherry Cola, Kiwi Guava and Wild Berry, plus a Random Variety mix. Choose a Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 12 for the home fridge, an office or a gym. Ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder CELSIUS Energy Drink\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSparkling ready-to-drink 12 fl oz can\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e200 mg of caffeine per can, as stated on the current label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eZero sugar in every flavor listed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeven selectable flavors from Peach Vibe to Wild Berry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRandom Variety option mixes flavors from available stock\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the can and drink it straight from the can or over ice. The label says it is meant for healthy adults, with a limit of two 12 fl oz cans per day and no more than one can within four hours. It is not advised for anyone under 18, pregnant or nursing, or sensitive to caffeine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout CELSIUS\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCELSIUS Holdings, Inc. is an energy drink company based in Boca Raton, Florida. Its drinks are sold through major retailers and online channels across the country. The brand builds its lineup around zero sugar and no artificial colors, and offers a wide flavor range, which is why one listing can cover fruity, citrus and cola-style cans together.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow much caffeine is in a CELSIUS Energy Drink 12 fl oz can?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe current label states 200 mg of caffeine per 12 fl oz can. That is a substantial amount, so the label advises healthy adults to stay within two cans a day and to space them at least four hours apart. Always read the printed can for the latest directions and warnings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs CELSIUS Energy Drink sugar free and what is in it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe flavors on this listing are labeled zero sugar and made without added artificial colors. Ingredients and sweeteners can vary by flavor and may be updated by the maker, so check the printed can label for the full ingredient and allergen details before drinking, especially if you follow a specific diet.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat CELSIUS flavors can I choose and what is Random Variety?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can pick Peach Vibe, Electric Vibe, Tropical Vibe, Orange, Cherry Cola, Kiwi Guava or Wild Berry. Random Variety is a mixed assortment drawn from the CELSIUS flavors in stock at the time, so the exact lineup in a pack can differ from order to order.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat CELSIUS pack sizes are available for an office or gym?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eCELSIUS Energy Drink is offered as a Single can, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. The larger packs help workplaces, gyms and households keep a supply of cans chilled and ready, and the Random Variety choice suits shared fridges where tastes vary.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How much caffeine is in a CELSIUS Energy Drink 12 fl oz can?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The current label states 200 mg of caffeine per 12 fl oz can. That is a substantial amount, so the label advises healthy adults to stay within two cans a day and to space them at least four hours apart. Always read the printed can for the latest directions and warnings.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is CELSIUS Energy Drink sugar free and what is in it?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The flavors on this listing are labeled zero sugar and made without added artificial colors. Ingredients and sweeteners can vary by flavor and may be updated by the maker, so check the printed can label for the full ingredient and allergen details before drinking, especially if you follow a specific diet.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What CELSIUS flavors can I choose and what is Random Variety?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can pick Peach Vibe, Electric Vibe, Tropical Vibe, Orange, Cherry Cola, Kiwi Guava or Wild Berry. Random Variety is a mixed assortment drawn from the CELSIUS flavors in stock at the time, so the exact lineup in a pack can differ from order to order.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What CELSIUS pack sizes are available for an office or gym?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"CELSIUS Energy Drink is offered as a Single can, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 12. The larger packs help workplaces, gyms and households keep a supply of cans chilled and ready, and the Random Variety choice suits shared fridges where tastes vary.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Celsius","offers":[{"title":"Peach Vibe \/ Single","offer_id":67604405453014,"sku":"CELSIUS-PEACH-VIBE-SINGLE","price":3.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Peach Vibe \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604405485782,"sku":"CELSIUS-PEACH-VIBE-PACK3","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Peach Vibe \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604405518550,"sku":"CELSIUS-PEACH-VIBE-PACK6","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Peach Vibe \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604405551318,"sku":"CELSIUS-PEACH-VIBE-PACK12","price":36.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Electric Vibe \/ Single","offer_id":67604405584086,"sku":"CELSIUS-ELECTRIC-VIBE-SINGLE","price":3.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Electric Vibe \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604405616854,"sku":"CELSIUS-ELECTRIC-VIBE-PACK3","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Electric Vibe \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604405649622,"sku":"CELSIUS-ELECTRIC-VIBE-PACK6","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Electric Vibe \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604405682390,"sku":"CELSIUS-ELECTRIC-VIBE-PACK12","price":36.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Tropical Vibe \/ Single","offer_id":67604405715158,"sku":"CELSIUS-TROPICAL-VIBE-SINGLE","price":3.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Tropical Vibe \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604405747926,"sku":"CELSIUS-TROPICAL-VIBE-PACK3","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Tropical Vibe \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604405780694,"sku":"CELSIUS-TROPICAL-VIBE-PACK6","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Tropical Vibe \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604405813462,"sku":"CELSIUS-TROPICAL-VIBE-PACK12","price":36.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Orange \/ Single","offer_id":67604405846230,"sku":"CELSIUS-ORANGE-SINGLE","price":3.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Orange \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604405878998,"sku":"CELSIUS-ORANGE-PACK3","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Orange \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604405911766,"sku":"CELSIUS-ORANGE-PACK6","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Orange \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604405944534,"sku":"CELSIUS-ORANGE-PACK12","price":36.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Cherry Cola \/ Single","offer_id":67604405977302,"sku":"CELSIUS-CHERRY-COLA-SINGLE","price":3.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Cherry Cola \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604406010070,"sku":"CELSIUS-CHERRY-COLA-PACK3","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Cherry Cola \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604406042838,"sku":"CELSIUS-CHERRY-COLA-PACK6","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Cherry Cola \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604406075606,"sku":"CELSIUS-CHERRY-COLA-PACK12","price":36.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Kiwi Guava \/ Single","offer_id":67604406108374,"sku":"CELSIUS-KIWI-GUAVA-SINGLE","price":3.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Kiwi Guava \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604406141142,"sku":"CELSIUS-KIWI-GUAVA-PACK3","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Kiwi Guava \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604406173910,"sku":"CELSIUS-KIWI-GUAVA-PACK6","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Kiwi Guava \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604406206678,"sku":"CELSIUS-KIWI-GUAVA-PACK12","price":36.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Wild Berry \/ Single","offer_id":67604406239446,"sku":"CELSIUS-WILD-BERRY-SINGLE","price":3.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Wild Berry \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604406272214,"sku":"CELSIUS-WILD-BERRY-PACK3","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Wild Berry \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604406304982,"sku":"CELSIUS-WILD-BERRY-PACK6","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Wild Berry \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604406337750,"sku":"CELSIUS-WILD-BERRY-PACK12","price":36.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Random Variety \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67604406370518,"sku":"CELSIUS-RANDOM-PACK3","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Random Variety \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67604406403286,"sku":"CELSIUS-RANDOM-PACK6","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Random Variety \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67604406436054,"sku":"CELSIUS-RANDOM-PACK12","price":36.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Watermelon \/ Single","offer_id":67625237643478,"sku":"CELSIUS-WATERMELON-SINGLE","price":3.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false},{"title":"Watermelon \/ Pack of 3","offer_id":67625237676246,"sku":"CELSIUS-WATERMELON-PACK3","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false},{"title":"Watermelon \/ Pack of 6","offer_id":67625237709014,"sku":"CELSIUS-WATERMELON-PACK6","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false},{"title":"Watermelon \/ Pack of 12","offer_id":67625237741782,"sku":"CELSIUS-WATERMELON-PACK12","price":36.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/celsius-vibe-random-variety-energy-drink.png?v=1791993109"},{"product_id":"nuun-sport-hydration-orange-10-electrolyte-tablets","title":"Nuun Sport Hydration Electrolyte Tablets, Orange, 10 Count","description":"\u003cp\u003eNuun Sport Hydration Orange is a tube of 10 effervescent electrolyte tablets that turns 16 fl oz (475 mL) of water into a lightly sweetened orange drink. It has 1 g of sugar per serving and no caffeine. The tube is sold as a single, a pack of 3 or a pack of 6, handy for gym bags, office drawers and team kits, and ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Nuun Sport Orange\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlavor: lightly sweetened natural orange\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCount: 10 tablets per tube, one 16 fl oz serving each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFive electrolytes: sodium 300 mg, potassium 150 mg, magnesium 25 mg, calcium 13 mg, chloride 40 mg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eJust 1 g of sugar per serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCaffeine-free formula\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVegan, gluten free, kosher and Non-GMO Project Verified\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Mix\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eDrop one tablet into 16 fl oz (475 mL) of water and wait until it stops fizzing before you drink. The label allows use up to three times a day. Close the tube cap firmly after each use, use only if the cap seal is unbroken, and store the tube in a cool, dry place.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nuun\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNuun makes compact hydration tablets built around electrolytes, so a drink can be mixed anywhere with just a bottle of water. The Sport line is the brand's everyday formula and comes in single-flavor tubes that are easy to carry. Orange is one of those flavors, sweetened lightly rather than heavily.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow much water do I use with one Nuun Sport Hydration Orange tablet?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eDissolve one tablet in 16 fl oz (475 mL) of water and let the fizzing stop before drinking. Using less water makes the drink taste stronger, while using more dilutes the flavor and the electrolyte concentration in each sip. Follow the label measurement for the intended taste and balance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nuun Sport Hydration Orange contain caffeine?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. This Sport Orange formula is caffeine-free and has no stimulants, so people can drink it at any time of day. It is not intended to diagnose, treat or prevent any condition, and anyone with a specific sensitivity or health concern should read the printed label before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many servings are in a tube of Nuun Sport Hydration Orange?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEach tube holds 10 tablets, and every tablet makes one 16 fl oz serving. That gives you 10 prepared drinks per tube. Keep the cap closed between uses and store the tube somewhere cool and dry so the tablets stay in good condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack options exist for Nuun Sport Hydration Orange?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can order a single tube, a pack of 3 or a pack of 6. The multipacks are useful for teams, offices, gyms or households that mix a drink most days, since each tube covers 10 servings. All options use the same orange flavor and the same tablet formula.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How much water do I use with one Nuun Sport Hydration Orange tablet?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Dissolve one tablet in 16 fl oz (475 mL) of water and let the fizzing stop before drinking. Using less water makes the drink taste stronger, while using more dilutes the flavor and the electrolyte concentration in each sip. Follow the label measurement for the intended taste and balance.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Nuun Sport Hydration Orange contain caffeine?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"No. This Sport Orange formula is caffeine-free and has no stimulants, so people can drink it at any time of day. It is not intended to diagnose, treat or prevent any condition, and anyone with a specific sensitivity or health concern should read the printed label before use.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How many servings are in a tube of Nuun Sport Hydration Orange?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Each tube holds 10 tablets, and every tablet makes one 16 fl oz serving. That gives you 10 prepared drinks per tube. Keep the cap closed between uses and store the tube somewhere cool and dry so the tablets stay in good condition.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What pack options exist for Nuun Sport Hydration Orange?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can order a single tube, a pack of 3 or a pack of 6. The multipacks are useful for teams, offices, gyms or households that mix a drink most days, since each tube covers 10 servings. All options use the same orange flavor and the same tablet formula.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nuun","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604406468822,"sku":"NUUN-SPORT-ORANGE-10CT-SINGLE","price":8.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604406501590,"sku":"NUUN-SPORT-ORANGE-10CT-PACK3","price":23.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604406534358,"sku":"NUUN-SPORT-ORANGE-10CT-PACK6","price":45.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/nuun-sport-hydration-orange-10-tablets.png?v=1791993109"},{"product_id":"5-hour-energy-extra-strength-watermelon-24-count","title":"5-hour Energy Watermelon Extra Strength Shots, 1.93 fl oz, 24 Count","description":"\u003cp\u003e5-hour ENERGY Extra Strength Watermelon is a box of 24 sugar-free energy shots, each a 1.93 fl oz bottle with 230 mg of caffeine. It ships from our US warehouse and is listed here as a single 24-count box. Keep a box in a desk drawer, a work locker, a car or a busy household for days when you need a quick, portable pick-me-up.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder 5-hour ENERGY Extra Strength Watermelon\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWatermelon flavor in the Extra Strength line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e24 individually sealed 1.93 fl oz (57 mL) bottles per box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e230 mg of caffeine per bottle, as listed on the Supplement Facts panel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSugar-free formula with no added sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContains niacin, vitamin B6 and vitamin B12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnergy Blend includes taurine, malic acid, N-acetyl L-tyrosine, L-phenylalanine and citicoline\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow the directions printed on the bottle. The label allows adults to drink half a bottle or a whole one, with no more than two bottles in a day and several hours between them. No fridge is needed, but finish or discard an opened bottle within 72 hours. Read the full warnings before first use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout 5-hour Energy\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e5-hour ENERGY is made by Living Essentials LLC in Michigan. The Extra Strength line packs its formula into a small bottle you can carry anywhere, and Watermelon is one of several flavors offered. This listing covers the Watermelon version only, sold as a full 24-count box for people who like to keep a steady supply on hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow much caffeine is in 5-hour ENERGY Extra Strength Watermelon?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEach 1.93 fl oz bottle lists 230 mg of caffeine on its Supplement Facts panel. That is a large amount for one serving, so count the coffee, tea, soda and other supplements you have the same day. If you are sensitive to caffeine, read the printed label before opening a bottle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I take 5-hour ENERGY Extra Strength Watermelon shots?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe bottle label tells adults to take half a bottle for moderate energy or the whole bottle for maximum energy. Do not go beyond two bottles in one day, and leave several hours between servings. An opened bottle should be finished or thrown away within 72 hours, even though refrigeration is not required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs this Watermelon shot sugar-free, and what else is inside?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe formula is sugar-free, with no added sugar. Each bottle lists niacin and vitamins B6 and B12 plus an Energy Blend of taurine, malic acid, N-acetyl L-tyrosine, L-phenylalanine and citicoline. Ingredients and warnings can be updated by the maker, so always check the printed label on the box you receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes 5-hour ENERGY Extra Strength Watermelon come in multipacks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThis listing is a single box that already holds 24 individually sealed bottles, so it works as a stocking-up size on its own. Offices, shift crews and busy households often keep one box on hand and reorder when it runs low. Other flavors in the line are sold under their own listings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How much caffeine is in 5-hour ENERGY Extra Strength Watermelon?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Each 1.93 fl oz bottle lists 230 mg of caffeine on its Supplement Facts panel. That is a large amount for one serving, so count the coffee, tea, soda and other supplements you have the same day. If you are sensitive to caffeine, read the printed label before opening a bottle.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I take 5-hour ENERGY Extra Strength Watermelon shots?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The bottle label tells adults to take half a bottle for moderate energy or the whole bottle for maximum energy. Do not go beyond two bottles in one day, and leave several hours between servings. An opened bottle should be finished or thrown away within 72 hours, even though refrigeration is not required.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is this Watermelon shot sugar-free, and what else is inside?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The formula is sugar-free, with no added sugar. Each bottle lists niacin and vitamins B6 and B12 plus an Energy Blend of taurine, malic acid, N-acetyl L-tyrosine, L-phenylalanine and citicoline. Ingredients and warnings can be updated by the maker, so always check the printed label on the box you receive.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does 5-hour ENERGY Extra Strength Watermelon come in multipacks?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"This listing is a single box that already holds 24 individually sealed bottles, so it works as a stocking-up size on its own. Offices, shift crews and busy households often keep one box on hand and reorder when it runs low. Other flavors in the line are sold under their own listings.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"5-hour Energy","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604406567126,"sku":"5HE-WATERMELON-XS-24CT","price":66.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/5-hour-energy-extra-strength-watermelon-24-count-box.png?v=1791993110"},{"product_id":"epsa-lemon-soda-sparkling-greek-soda-7-84-fl-oz-232ml","title":"EPSA Sparkling Greek Lemon Soda, 7.84 fl oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eEPSA Lemon Soda is a 7.84 fl oz (232 mL) sparkling Greek soft drink flavored with natural lemon flavorings and bottled in EPSA's embossed glass bottle. It is an import from Greece with fine carbonation and no artificial colors. Choose a Single bottle or a Pack of 4, 8 or 12 for dinner parties, cafés, restaurants and the home fridge. Ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder EPSA Lemon Soda\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSparkling lemon soda made with natural lemon flavorings and citric acid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo artificial colors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFine carbonation, light rather than heavy or syrupy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePer 7.84 fl oz (232 mL) bottle: 88 calories and 22 g of sugars, per the label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEmbossed green glass bottle, the same format sold in Greece\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProduct of Greece, available as Single, Pack of 4, Pack of 8 or Pack of 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChill the bottle thoroughly, then drink it straight from the glass bottle or pour it over ice. It goes well with grilled seafood and Mediterranean mezze, and it also stands alone as a small, cold refreshment. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sunlight and read the label for full ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout EPSA\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEPSA, short for Elliniki Paragogi Soft Drinks, has been making soft drinks in Greece since 1924 and counts among the country's oldest beverage brands. Its glass-bottle range includes lemon soda, orangeade and a sour cherry drink, a familiar sight in Greek cafés and kiosks. This listing covers the lemon soda in the classic embossed bottle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is in EPSA Lemon Soda Sparkling Greek Soda?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is made with natural lemon flavorings and citric acid, with fine carbonation and no artificial colors. The label lists 88 calories and 22 g of sugars per 7.84 fl oz bottle. Formulas can change, so read the printed bottle label for the full ingredient and allergen details.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve EPSA Lemon Soda?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eChill the bottle well and serve it straight from the glass or poured over ice. It pairs nicely with grilled seafood, mezze and other Mediterranean dishes. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sunlight, and refrigerate them before serving for the crispest sparkle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes EPSA Lemon Soda different from heavier, syrupy sodas?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is a Greek lemon soda with a crisp citrus taste and light, fine carbonation, rather than a heavy or syrupy sweetness. It arrives in EPSA's embossed glass bottle, the same format sold in Greece, so it works well for restaurant tables, dinner parties and anyone who prefers lighter fizz.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich pack sizes of EPSA Lemon Soda are available for parties or cafés?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEPSA Lemon Soda comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 4, a Pack of 8 or a Pack of 12. The small 232 mL bottles are convenient for individual servings, so the larger packs work for restaurant tables, events and households that like to keep a few Greek sodas chilled.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is in EPSA Lemon Soda Sparkling Greek Soda?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is made with natural lemon flavorings and citric acid, with fine carbonation and no artificial colors. The label lists 88 calories and 22 g of sugars per 7.84 fl oz bottle. Formulas can change, so read the printed bottle label for the full ingredient and allergen details.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I serve EPSA Lemon Soda?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Chill the bottle well and serve it straight from the glass or poured over ice. It pairs nicely with grilled seafood, mezze and other Mediterranean dishes. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sunlight, and refrigerate them before serving for the crispest sparkle.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What makes EPSA Lemon Soda different from heavier, syrupy sodas?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is a Greek lemon soda with a crisp citrus taste and light, fine carbonation, rather than a heavy or syrupy sweetness. It arrives in EPSA's embossed glass bottle, the same format sold in Greece, so it works well for restaurant tables, dinner parties and anyone who prefers lighter fizz.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which pack sizes of EPSA Lemon Soda are available for parties or cafés?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"EPSA Lemon Soda comes as a Single bottle, a Pack of 4, a Pack of 8 or a Pack of 12. The small 232 mL bottles are convenient for individual servings, so the larger packs work for restaurant tables, events and households that like to keep a few Greek sodas chilled.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Epsa","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604406599894,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONSODA-232ML-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 4","offer_id":67604406632662,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONSODA-232ML-PACK4","price":16.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 8","offer_id":67604406665430,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONSODA-232ML-PACK8","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":67604406698198,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONSODA-232ML-PACK12","price":46.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/eps.jpg?v=1791993111"},{"product_id":"fentimans-traditional-cherry-cola-9-3-fl-oz-275ml-botanically-brewed-est-1905","title":"Fentimans Traditional Cherry Cola, Botanically Brewed, 9.3 fl oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eFentimans Traditional Cherry Cola, 9.3 fl oz (275 mL), is a botanically brewed sparkling cola with a cherry flavor, bottled in glass. It is sold as a single, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 10, which makes it easy to stock a home bar, café fridge or party table. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Fentimans Traditional Cherry Cola\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e9.3 fl oz (275 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBotanically brewed with cherry flavor and herbal extracts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e90 calories and 21 g total sugars per bottle, per the nutrition label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNatural sediment may settle, so tip the bottle before pouring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorks as a mixer with bourbon, rum or whiskey\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSold as Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 10\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eTurn the bottle gently upside down before opening so any settled sediment spreads out, then pour over ice and serve well chilled. For a cherry bourbon cola, combine 1.5 oz of bourbon with a chilled bottle over ice and garnish with a maraschino cherry.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Fentimans\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFentimans was established in 1905 by Thomas Fentiman in the north of England. The brand is known for botanical brewing, which uses herbs, roots and other plant ingredients as part of the recipe instead of simply mixing a syrup into soda water. Fentimans still bottles its range with that traditional approach.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Fentimans Traditional Cherry Cola contain alcohol?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is sold and classified as a non-alcoholic botanical drink. Because botanical brewing can leave trace alcohol, the amount is typically well under 0.5% ABV, the usual threshold for non-alcoholic labeling. If you need to avoid alcohol completely, read the printed label or contact the manufacturer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy should I tip the Fentimans Cherry Cola bottle before pouring?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe drink is brewed with real plant ingredients, so a little natural sediment can settle at the bottom while it sits. Gently turning the bottle over before opening spreads that sediment through the liquid, keeping flavor and appearance consistent from the first glass to the last.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Fentimans Cherry Cola different from a typical cherry cola?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFentimans uses a botanical brewing method with cherry flavor and herbal extracts rather than relying on a simple syrup mix. It comes in a glass bottle. The label also shows 90 calories per bottle, so compare it with your usual cola.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich Fentimans Cherry Cola pack sizes are available for a bar or office?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can order a single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 10. Larger packs suit restaurants, cafés, offices and events that pour over ice or build cocktails, while the smaller packs work for households that want a few bottles in the fridge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Fentimans Traditional Cherry Cola contain alcohol?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is sold and classified as a non-alcoholic botanical drink. Because botanical brewing can leave trace alcohol, the amount is typically well under 0.5% ABV, the usual threshold for non-alcoholic labeling. If you need to avoid alcohol completely, read the printed label or contact the manufacturer.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Why should I tip the Fentimans Cherry Cola bottle before pouring?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The drink is brewed with real plant ingredients, so a little natural sediment can settle at the bottom while it sits. Gently turning the bottle over before opening spreads that sediment through the liquid, keeping flavor and appearance consistent from the first glass to the last.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What makes Fentimans Cherry Cola different from a typical cherry cola?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Fentimans uses a botanical brewing method with cherry flavor and herbal extracts rather than relying on a simple syrup mix. It comes in a glass bottle. The label also shows 90 calories per bottle, so compare it with your usual cola.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which Fentimans Cherry Cola pack sizes are available for a bar or office?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can order a single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 10. Larger packs suit restaurants, cafés, offices and events that pour over ice or build cocktails, while the smaller packs work for households that want a few bottles in the fridge.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Fentimans","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604406730966,"sku":"FENTIMANS-CHERRYCOLA-9OZ-SINGLE","price":3.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604406763734,"sku":"FENTIMANS-CHERRYCOLA-9OZ-PACK3","price":10.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604406796502,"sku":"FENTIMANS-CHERRYCOLA-9OZ-PACK6","price":20.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 10","offer_id":67604406829270,"sku":"FENTIMANS-CHERRYCOLA-9OZ-PACK10","price":34.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/image_e6b92f7a-0cc8-424f-bc09-29aa7bee88e1.png?v=1791993111"},{"product_id":"fentimans-victorian-lemonade-9-3-fl-oz-275ml-botanically-brewed-est-1905","title":"Fentimans Victorian Lemonade, Botanically Brewed, 9.3 fl oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eFentimans Victorian Lemonade, 9.3 fl oz (275 mL), is a botanically brewed sparkling lemonade made with real lemon and herbal extracts and bottled in glass. Available as a single, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 10, it suits home fridges, cafés and party tables. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people reorder Fentimans Victorian Lemonade\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e9.3 fl oz (275 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBotanically brewed with real lemon and herbal extracts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e110 calories and 22 g total sugars per bottle, per the nutrition label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNatural sediment may settle, so tip the bottle before pouring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorks with gin, vodka or champagne, or in mocktails\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSold as Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6 or Pack of 10\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Mix\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eTurn the bottle gently over before opening, then pour and serve well chilled over ice. Enjoy it plain, or mix it with gin, vodka, champagne or prosecco. For a mocktail, combine it with fresh lemon juice, muddled mint and plenty of ice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Fentimans\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFentimans was established in 1905 by Thomas Fentiman in the north of England. The brand is known for botanical brewing, which uses herbs, roots and other plant ingredients as part of the recipe instead of simply mixing a syrup into soda water. Fentimans still bottles its range with that traditional approach.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Fentimans Victorian Lemonade contain alcohol?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is sold and classified as a non-alcoholic botanical beverage. Like other botanically brewed drinks it may hold trace alcohol left from brewing, typically well under 0.5% ABV, the common threshold for non-alcoholic labeling. If you have a specific concern, read the label or contact the manufacturer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy should I tip Fentimans Victorian Lemonade before pouring?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBecause the drink is brewed with real plant ingredients, natural sediment can settle toward the bottom while the bottle waits on a shelf. Gently inverting it before opening spreads the sediment through the liquid, so flavor and appearance stay even from the first pour to the last.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Fentimans Victorian Lemonade gluten-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eDo not assume it is. Fentimans does not certify this product as gluten-free in the details available to us, so anyone with celiac disease or a gluten sensitivity should read the printed ingredient list and allergen statement on the bottle before drinking or serving it to guests.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat Fentimans Victorian Lemonade pack sizes can I order for a café or party?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYou can order a single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 10. Bigger packs are useful for cafés, offices and gatherings where lemonade is poured over ice or used as a mixer, while singles and threes suit a home fridge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Fentimans Victorian Lemonade contain alcohol?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is sold and classified as a non-alcoholic botanical beverage. Like other botanically brewed drinks it may hold trace alcohol left from brewing, typically well under 0.5% ABV, the common threshold for non-alcoholic labeling. If you have a specific concern, read the label or contact the manufacturer.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Why should I tip Fentimans Victorian Lemonade before pouring?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Because the drink is brewed with real plant ingredients, natural sediment can settle toward the bottom while the bottle waits on a shelf. Gently inverting it before opening spreads the sediment through the liquid, so flavor and appearance stay even from the first pour to the last.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Fentimans Victorian Lemonade gluten-free?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Do not assume it is. Fentimans does not certify this product as gluten-free in the details available to us, so anyone with celiac disease or a gluten sensitivity should read the printed ingredient list and allergen statement on the bottle before drinking or serving it to guests.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What Fentimans Victorian Lemonade pack sizes can I order for a café or party?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"You can order a single bottle, a Pack of 3, a Pack of 6 or a Pack of 10. Bigger packs are useful for cafés, offices and gatherings where lemonade is poured over ice or used as a mixer, while singles and threes suit a home fridge.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Fentimans","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604406862038,"sku":"FENTIMANS-VICTORIANLEMONADE-9OZ-SINGLE","price":3.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604406894806,"sku":"FENTIMANS-VICTORIANLEMONADE-9OZ-PACK3","price":10.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604406927574,"sku":"FENTIMANS-VICTORIANLEMONADE-9OZ-PACK6","price":20.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 10","offer_id":67604406960342,"sku":"FENTIMANS-VICTORIANLEMONADE-9OZ-PACK10","price":34.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/image_31f001a9-523b-4884-b38a-2b5c91fc9262.png?v=1791993112"},{"product_id":"sown-organic-oat-creamer-salted-caramel-32floz","title":"Sown Organic Oat Creamer Salted Caramel, Gluten Free, 32 fl oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eSown Organic Oat Creamer Salted Caramel is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) Tetra Pak carton of plant-based oat creamer made from organic oatmilk, organic cane sugar and sea salt. It is USDA Organic, Non-GMO Project Verified and Certified Gluten Free. Choose a Single carton, a Pack of 3 or a Pack of 6 for home coffee bars, offices and cafés. Ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy coffee drinkers reorder Sown Salted Caramel Oat Creamer\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSalted caramel flavor on an oatmilk base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUSDA Organic and Non-GMO Project Verified\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCertified Gluten Free, with GFCO certification on the carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKosher (U), per the label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDairy-free and vegan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, about 63 servings at 1 tbsp\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShake well, then add one to two tablespoons to hot or cold coffee, tea or another drink, adjusting to taste. The carton is shelf-stable before opening. After opening, keep it refrigerated, use it within 30 days as the label states, and keep the cap closed tightly between uses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Sown\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSown makes plant-based coffee creamers built on an oat base, using oats from certified North American growers. This salted caramel carton is USDA Organic, Non-GMO Project Verified, Certified Gluten Free and Kosher (U). It is distributed by SunOpta Grains and Foods Inc. and is aimed at coffee drinkers who prefer a dairy-free creamer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Sown Organic Oat Creamer Salted Caramel contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is made from oats and is Certified Gluten Free by GFCO. The label lists no dairy or other animal ingredients. Anyone with an oat sensitivity or other allergy concern should read the printed ingredient label on the carton, because formulas and facility notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Sown Oat Creamer need to be refrigerated?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe unopened Tetra Pak carton is shelf-stable and can sit at room temperature. Once opened, refrigerate it right away and use it within 30 days, per the printed label. Shake before each use, because natural separation can occur in plant-based creamers over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow sweet is the Sown Salted Caramel oat creamer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe ingredients include organic cane sugar and sea salt, plus organic natural flavor for the salted caramel taste. For the exact grams of sugar in a 1 tbsp (15 mL) serving, read the nutrition label on the carton, because formulations can be updated by the manufacturer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Sown Organic Oat Creamer vegan, and can I buy multipacks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, it lists organic oatmilk as its base and no animal ingredients, so it is plant-based and dairy-free. The 32 fl oz carton is available as a Single, a Pack of 3 and a Pack of 6, which helps offices and cafés stock a dairy-free creamer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Sown Organic Oat Creamer Salted Caramel contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is made from oats and is Certified Gluten Free by GFCO. The label lists no dairy or other animal ingredients. Anyone with an oat sensitivity or other allergy concern should read the printed ingredient label on the carton, because formulas and facility notices can change between production runs.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Sown Oat Creamer need to be refrigerated?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The unopened Tetra Pak carton is shelf-stable and can sit at room temperature. Once opened, refrigerate it right away and use it within 30 days, per the printed label. Shake before each use, because natural separation can occur in plant-based creamers over time.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How sweet is the Sown Salted Caramel oat creamer?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The ingredients include organic cane sugar and sea salt, plus organic natural flavor for the salted caramel taste. For the exact grams of sugar in a 1 tbsp (15 mL) serving, read the nutrition label on the carton, because formulations can be updated by the manufacturer.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Sown Organic Oat Creamer vegan, and can I buy multipacks?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes, it lists organic oatmilk as its base and no animal ingredients, so it is plant-based and dairy-free. The 32 fl oz carton is available as a Single, a Pack of 3 and a Pack of 6, which helps offices and cafés stock a dairy-free creamer.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Sown","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604406993110,"sku":"SOWN-OAT-CREAMER-SALTEDCARAMEL-32OZ-SINGLE","price":10.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604407025878,"sku":"SOWN-OAT-CREAMER-SALTEDCARAMEL-32OZ-PACK3","price":29.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":67604407058646,"sku":"SOWN-OAT-CREAMER-SALTEDCARAMEL-32OZ-PACK6","price":54.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/image_e9fbeba1-741e-4a88-9aa4-0aa393b78a85.png?v=1791993113"},{"product_id":"icelandic-glacial-natural-spring-water-1500ml-507floz","title":"Icelandic Glacial Natural Spring Water, 1500 mL, CarbonNeutral, pH 8.4","description":"\u003cp\u003eIcelandic Glacial Natural Spring Water in the 50.7 fl oz (1500 mL) bottle is naturally alkaline spring water from the Olfus Spring in Iceland, with a label pH of 8.4 and a TDS of 62 ppm. This large format comes as a single bottle or a Pack of 3, well suited to shared fridges. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy people stock Icelandic Glacial 1500 mL\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e50.7 fl oz (1500 mL) large-format bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabel pH of 8.4, naturally alkaline, with no alkalizing agents added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTDS of 62 ppm for a clean, light taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSourced at the Olfus Spring in Iceland and bottled at the source\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCarbonNeutral product certification\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo fluoride, added minerals or flavoring; sold as Single or Pack of 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Serve\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePour it chilled or at room temperature for everyday drinking, workouts or meals. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sunlight and strong odors. After opening, refrigerate the bottle and finish it within a few days. The big bottle is handy for sharing or refilling smaller bottles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Icelandic Glacial\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIcelandic Glacial bottles water sourced from the Olfus Spring in Iceland, where volcanic rock has filtered it naturally for thousands of years. The brand holds CarbonNeutral certification, and it bottles the water close to the source with nothing added. Check the printed label for the full certification and mineral details.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Icelandic Glacial 1500 mL spring water contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is bottled spring water with nothing added: no fluoride, minerals or flavoring. Bottled water typically carries no major food allergens, but bottling lines can handle other products on the same site, so anyone with a severe allergy should check the printed label for current information.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store the Icelandic Glacial 1.5 L bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong smells, since plastic can pick up nearby odors over time. Once opened, refrigerate the bottle and finish it within a few days for the best taste. The size works well for sharing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat do pH 8.4 and TDS 62 mean on Icelandic Glacial water?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe pH of 8.4 means the water is naturally alkaline, a result of slow filtration through volcanic rock rather than added agents. TDS of 62 ppm describes total dissolved solids, a modest mineral load that contributes to a light, clean taste. Both figures come from the label.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich Icelandic Glacial 1500 mL pack sizes are available for an office?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe 1500 mL bottle is sold as a single or a Pack of 3. A multipack bundles identical bottles in one order, which suits shared office fridges, family households and gatherings where a large table bottle is more practical than many small ones.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Icelandic Glacial 1500 mL spring water contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"It is bottled spring water with nothing added: no fluoride, minerals or flavoring. Bottled water typically carries no major food allergens, but bottling lines can handle other products on the same site, so anyone with a severe allergy should check the printed label for current information.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How should I store the Icelandic Glacial 1.5 L bottle?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong smells, since plastic can pick up nearby odors over time. Once opened, refrigerate the bottle and finish it within a few days for the best taste. The size works well for sharing.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What do pH 8.4 and TDS 62 mean on Icelandic Glacial water?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The pH of 8.4 means the water is naturally alkaline, a result of slow filtration through volcanic rock rather than added agents. TDS of 62 ppm describes total dissolved solids, a modest mineral load that contributes to a light, clean taste. Both figures come from the label.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Which Icelandic Glacial 1500 mL pack sizes are available for an office?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 1500 mL bottle is sold as a single or a Pack of 3. A multipack bundles identical bottles in one order, which suits shared office fridges, family households and gatherings where a large table bottle is more practical than many small ones.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Icelandic Glacial","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604407091414,"sku":"ICELANDIC-GLACIAL-1500ML-SINGLE","price":5.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604407124182,"sku":"ICELANDIC-GLACIAL-1500ML-PACK3","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/image_1bf48f4e-5004-4541-936f-8e5b34efec6e.png?v=1791993113"},{"product_id":"four-sigmatic-mushroom-coffee-mix-lions-mane-chaga-10-packets","title":"Four Sigmatic Organic Lion's Mane \u0026 Chaga Mushroom Coffee, 10 Packets","description":"\u003cp\u003eFour Sigmatic Mushroom Coffee Mix with Lion's Mane and Chaga is a USDA Organic box of 10 instant packets, each 0.09 oz (2.5 g), blending organic instant coffee with mushroom extracts. Order a single box or a Pack of 3 for the office, travel or the pantry. It ships from our US warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat is inside Four Sigmatic Mushroom Coffee Mix\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e10 individual packets, 0.09 oz (2.5 g) each, 0.9 oz total\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOrganic instant coffee base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOrganic Lion's Mane and Chaga extracts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOrganic Rhodiola Rosea extract listed on the label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUSDA Organic: all four listed ingredients are certified organic\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSold as Single box or Pack of 3\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow to Mix\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEmpty one packet into a mug, add 8 fl oz (240 mL) of hot water and stir until dissolved. You can stir it into milk or creamer, or blend it into a smoothie. Check the printed label for caffeine per packet, and store unused packets in a cool, dry place away from heat and moisture.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout Four Sigmatic\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFour Sigmatic is a Finland-founded brand that blends organic instant coffee with mushroom extracts such as Lion's Mane and Chaga. This particular mix also lists organic Rhodiola Rosea extract, and every listed ingredient is certified USDA Organic. It is packaged in single-serve sachets that are easy to pack.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is in Four Sigmatic Mushroom Coffee with Lion's Mane and Chaga?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe mix lists organic instant coffee powder with organic Lion's Mane extract, organic Chaga extract and organic Rhodiola Rosea extract. All four listed ingredients are certified USDA Organic. Formulations can change between production runs, so read the full ingredient list printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I prepare Four Sigmatic Mushroom Coffee packets?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePour one packet into a mug, add 8 fl oz (240 mL) of hot water and stir until it dissolves. It can also be mixed with milk or creamer or added to a smoothie. Keep unused packets in a cool, dry spot away from moisture and heat.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow much caffeine is in each Four Sigmatic packet?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe caffeine comes from the organic instant coffee base, but this page does not state an exact figure. Look at the printed label on the box for the caffeine content per packet, especially if you are sensitive to caffeine or planning to drink several cups a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I order several boxes of Four Sigmatic Mushroom Coffee for an office?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It is available as a single box of 10 packets or as a Pack of 3, which bundles identical boxes in one order. The individual packets need only hot water, so they suit shared kitchens, desk drawers and travel bags.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is in Four Sigmatic Mushroom Coffee with Lion's Mane and Chaga?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The mix lists organic instant coffee powder with organic Lion's Mane extract, organic Chaga extract and organic Rhodiola Rosea extract. All four listed ingredients are certified USDA Organic. Formulations can change between production runs, so read the full ingredient list printed on the box.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I prepare Four Sigmatic Mushroom Coffee packets?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Pour one packet into a mug, add 8 fl oz (240 mL) of hot water and stir until it dissolves. It can also be mixed with milk or creamer or added to a smoothie. Keep unused packets in a cool, dry spot away from moisture and heat.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How much caffeine is in each Four Sigmatic packet?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The caffeine comes from the organic instant coffee base, but this page does not state an exact figure. Look at the printed label on the box for the caffeine content per packet, especially if you are sensitive to caffeine or planning to drink several cups a day.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I order several boxes of Four Sigmatic Mushroom Coffee for an office?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. It is available as a single box of 10 packets or as a Pack of 3, which bundles identical boxes in one order. The individual packets need only hot water, so they suit shared kitchens, desk drawers and travel bags.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Four Sigmatic","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":67604407156950,"sku":"FOURSIGMATIC-MUSHCOFFEE-LIONSCHAGA-10PKT-SINGLE","price":15.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":67604407189718,"sku":"FOURSIGMATIC-MUSHCOFFEE-LIONSCHAGA-10PKT-PACK3","price":43.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0847\/7268\/3990\/files\/image_869031ab-1c1a-41f0-ada0-9749f780d2ab.png?v=1791993114"}],"url":"https:\/\/bevcrate.com\/collections\/shop-all-drinks.oembed","provider":"BevCrate","version":"1.0","type":"link"}